JP5328534B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a first variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of first identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, and each based on the establishment of the second start condition. And a second variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of second identification information that can be identified, and the game result is determined by deriving the display result to the first variable display means or the second variable display means. In addition, the present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a specific gaming result.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Such a gaming machine has two variable indicators that variably display a special symbol, a first start winning port and a second starting winning port, and a big hit if the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol When the game is executed and the big hit game is finished, the game shifts to the high base state at a predetermined rate. When the second start winning occurs, the change of the second special symbol is started and the stop symbol is the small hit symbol. The game ball is controlled to be able to win a prize in the second big prize opening (commodity), and when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the second big prize opening in that state, the big hit game is executed. At the same time, when a game ball is won in the second big winning opening and the lottery is performed when the game ball passes a specific area, the big hit game is not executed after the big hit game is finished. 1st special design and 2nd special Variable display handle is those that transition to the high base state continues until executed 100 times (e.g., see Patent Document 1).

  On the other hand, an operation button that can be operated by the player is provided, and each random number value is pre-read at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the start winning opening provided in the game area, and the variable display corresponding to the start win is executed. A notice to determine whether or not to execute a notice display (notice effect) different from the reach effect is determined based on the result of the determination, and whether or not to be a big hit is determined based on the determination result When the player performs an operation on the operation button within a predetermined effective period after executing the selection effect, the display mode of the start memory display area (for example, a round shape) is changed to a special display mode ( For example, there is a device that executes a notice display by changing to a heart shape (for example, see Patent Document 2).

  In addition, two variable indicators that variably display special symbols, a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided, and in a specific gaming state, the second starting winning opening can be made into a state in which a game ball can be won. In the case of a game state (an advantageous state, such as a probable change state or a short time state) after the probability change big hit, the change in the second special symbol based on winning in the second starting winning opening is made while increasing the frequency of change. Some prioritize display (see, for example, Patent Document 3).

JP2007-195822 (page 21) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-357878 (page 18, FIG. 10) JP 2007-75216 A (pages 34-38, 16-18, 20-21)

  However, in Patent Document 1, when a big hit game is executed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the second big prize opening in the high base state, the big hit game is ended. Whether or not to shift to the high base state later is determined by a lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area, so that the game ball passes through the specific area and the big hit game is executed. There is a problem that if the player does not shift to the high base state, the player's willingness to play is significantly attenuated.

  On the other hand, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable displays as described in Patent Document 3, it is conceivable that a pre-reading notice as described in Patent Document 2 can be executed. However, if the pre-reading notice is executed based on the fact that the game ball has started and won at the first start winning opening during the advantageous gaming state, the variation display result of the first special symbol executed during the advantageous gaming state is a big hit. It is recognized by the player that there is a high possibility of becoming. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 3, during the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to start a winning at the second starting winning opening and the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed. 2. The second special symbol is continuously displayed by continuously executing the variable display of the second special symbol so that the start winning to the start winning port is not interrupted, and the expected jackpot as the variable display result of the first special symbol is held. It becomes possible to aim at the big hit based on the fluctuation display of. Then, it is easy to be targeted by the technical intervention of the player, and the number of big hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously generated. There is a risk that the prize ball will be deliberately targeted and the gambling will become too high.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and does not attenuate game willingness after the end of a specific gaming state, and performs pre-reading notice in a gaming machine having a plurality of variable indicators. In this case, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from intentionally aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls by continuously generating jackpots by technical intervention of a player.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A first variable display that variably displays a plurality of types of first identification information (first special symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition (starting winning at the first starting winning opening). Based on the means (first special symbol display device 4A) and establishment of the second starting condition (start winning winning in the second starting winning opening), a plurality of types of second identification information (second A second variable display means (first special symbol display device 4B) for performing variable display of the special symbol, and the result of the game is derived by deriving the display result to the first variable display means or the second variable display means. A game machine (pachinko machine 1)
First hold storage means (first hold storage buffer) for storing a right (first hold storage) for performing variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition;
Second hold storage means (second hold storage buffer) for storing a right (second hold storage) for performing variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Determining whether or not the game result is a specific game result (a jackpot display result) for variable display of the first identification information performed by one right stored in the first hold storage means; Whether the game result is a predetermined game result (small hit display result) for the variable display of the second identification information performed by one right stored in the second holding storage means, the first Predetermining means (for example, executing steps S61, S62, 63, and S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining the game result as a specific game result with respect to variable display of identification information. Part)
A game medium (game ball) is allowed to enter on condition that the game result by the variable display of the second identification information performed by one right stored in the second holding storage means becomes the predetermined game result. A variable winning device (40) that performs a starting operation that changes into a fully open state and a closed state that cannot be entered;
Specific detection means (specific area switch 24) for detecting a game medium that has entered the specific area (49) among a plurality of areas (specific area 49, normal area 50) provided in the variable winning device;
The result of the game by the variable display of the first identification information performed by one right stored in the first holding storage means becomes the specific game result or the variable that has been released by the starting operation Specific game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that controls to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium that has entered the winning device is detected by the specific detection means. Part for executing steps S71 and S511 in FIG.
The frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the second identification information for a predetermined advantageous period (2nd special figure game 2 times or 2nd special figure game 10 times) after the end of the specific gaming state. Advantageous state control means for controlling the gaming state to the advantageous state (the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state) in which the frequency of execution of variable display is increased (for example, a part for executing step S208 in the gaming control microcomputer 560);
In the advantageous state, when the right is stored in both the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means, the variable of the second identification information is more variable than the variable display of the first identification information. Variable display control means for giving priority to display (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, if the second reserved memory number is not 0 in step S52, step S53 is executed with priority given to the special symbol pointer. 2 ”is set, and the process after step S55 is executed to execute the variable display of the second special symbol),
When the first start condition is satisfied, the game result by the variable display of the first identification information performed according to the right stored in the first holding storage means is changed from the specific game result by the prior determination means. A starting condition establishment means for determining whether or not it is determined (for example, a part for executing step S220 in the game control microcomputer 560);
After one right is stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means, a notice of the possibility that the result of the game by the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific game result by the one right. Effect control for executing pre-reading notice (pending notice effect, see FIG. 67) until the variable display of the identification information performed by the right is started based on the determination result of the determination means when the start condition is satisfied. Means (first hold memory number display update process performed by the production control microcomputer 120);
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state determination limiting means for restricting execution of the determination by the starting condition satisfaction determination means (for example, a part for executing step S216A in the game control microcomputer 560);
With
The variable winning device is:
A guide path (upper sphere path 34, lower stage 35, lower sphere path 36) capable of guiding the game medium that has entered the variable winning device to any of the plurality of areas;
A movable part (foot model 51) provided in the guide path;
With
The gaming machine may further include a movable operation and / or a start of the movable unit based on the fact that the pre-determining unit determines that the game result is a predetermined game result for the variable display of the second identification information. Action control pattern determination means (game control microcomputer) for determining an action control pattern including an action from any of a plurality of kinds of action control patterns having different ratios of game media entering the variable prize device entering the specific area 560 is a part for executing display result designation command transmission processing),
Based on the motion control pattern determined by the motion control pattern determining means, motion control means for controlling the execution of the movable motion and / or the starting motion (the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the small hit control pattern). A portion for performing drive control of the first prize opening door solenoid 53 and the model solenoid 52, see FIGS.
The advantageous state control means determines the predetermined advantageous period, which is controlled to the advantageous state after the end of the specific gaming state, from any of a plurality of advantageous periods, and controls the advantageous state. When it is controlled to the specific gaming state when being played, it is determined as a longer advantageous period at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the specific gaming state when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the normal gaming state) Advantageous period determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S196 and S204 based on the small hit type determination table);
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the specific gaming state is ended, not only the advantageous state is controlled, but also after the specific gaming state controlled in the advantageous state is ended, the specific gaming state controlled in other than the advantageous state is ended. Since it is controlled to be in an advantageous state over a long advantageous period at a higher rate than later, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being continuously controlled to a specific gaming state. Also, depending on the combination status of the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determining means and the operation control pattern determined by the action control pattern determining means, the advantageous state is terminated at a predetermined rate without being controlled to a specific gaming state during the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous state from being excessively continuously controlled, and to control the specific gaming state during the advantageous period by changing the combination of the advantageous period and the operation control pattern. Therefore, it is difficult to predict whether or not it is possible to maintain the expectation that the advantageous state will continue.
Further, by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information becomes the specific game result during the advantageous state, the specific game state is continuously generated by the technical intervention of the player. It is possible to prevent deliberately aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls.
The advantageous state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased is, for example, that a game ball enters the start port through a variable device provided at the start port. The first state that is easy and the second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or does not enter the starting port is increased, and the variable device is set to the first state. Decreasing the time interval to be determined, extending the period for maintaining the variable device in the first state, increasing the number of times the variable device is in the first state, or changing the length or angle of the movable member, etc. It is possible to change the form so that the game medium is easily guided to the second starting area, to combine any of these, or to combine all of them.
The advantageous period is not limited to the time controlled to the advantageous state, and may be a period until a predetermined end condition such as the number of executions of variable display of identification information is established.
In addition, a plurality of types of motion control patterns having different proportions of game media that have entered the variable prize device enter the specific area have different motion modes (motions) of the movable portion, and timing at which the movable motion starts. Are different patterns, patterns having different operation modes (movements) of the start operation, patterns having different timings at which the start operation is started, patterns combining any of these, or patterns combining all of them.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The pre-determining means (for example, the part executing steps S61, S62, 63, and S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) is one right stored in the first reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer). Determining which specific game result (first to fifth jackpot display results) among a plurality of types of game results by variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol) performed by
The advantageous period determining means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S196 and S204 based on the small hit type determination table) depends on the type of the specific game result determined by the prior determination means. Determine a different advantageous period (see FIG. 11 (b)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only the result of the game by the variable display of the first identification information becomes the specific game result, but also the specific game result of a type in which the advantageous period after the end of the specific gaming state becomes more advantageous. Therefore, the expectation for the game result by the variable display of the first identification information is improved.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The pre-determining means (for example, the part for executing steps S61, S62, 63, and S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) outputs a plurality of types of predetermined game results as a result of the game based on the establishment of the second start condition. Decide which of the predetermined game results (the 1st to 4th small hit display results) to derive from
The advantageous period determining means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S196 and S204 based on the small hit type determination table) depends on the type of the predetermined game result determined by the prior determination means. One of the plurality of types of advantageous periods (two second special figure games or ten second special figure games) is determined (see FIG. 11D).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only the game result by the variable display of the second identification information becomes the predetermined game result, but also the predetermined game result of a kind in which the advantageous period after the end of the specific gaming state becomes more advantageous. Therefore, the expectation for the game result by the variable display of the second identification information is improved.

A gaming machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3,
When the advantageous state (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) is controlled after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the advantageous period determining means (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is small hitting). Advantageous period notifying means (production control microcomputer 120) for notifying the advantageous period determined in step S196 and S204 based on the type determination table during the period controlled in the specific gaming state. Includes a portion for executing the jackpot end effect process, see FIG. 68 (a)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the advantageous period of the advantageous state controlled thereafter during the specific gaming state is notified, the interest in the specific gaming state is improved.

A gaming machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), a determination limiting means during specific gaming state for limiting execution of determination by the determination means when the starting condition is satisfied (for example, a part for executing step S220 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). (For example, a part for executing step S217A in the game control microcomputer 560),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the specific game state is continuously set by the technical intervention of the player by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information becomes the specific game result during the specific game state. Thus, it is possible to prevent intentional aiming of more than the expected number of prize balls.

A gaming machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
A variable for determining a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means (for example, the part for executing steps S61, S62, 63, and S73 in the game control microcomputer 560). Display pattern determination means (part for executing steps S214A and S214B in the game control microcomputer 560);
The first reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer) and the second reserved storage means (second reserved storage buffer) store the right up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4),
The variable display pattern determining means includes
Specific variable display patterns (super CA2-7, CA3-4) are used as variable display patterns of the identification information at a higher rate than when the prior determination means determines not to determine the specific game result. (See FIGS. 9 (a) (b), 10 (a) (b)),
A variable display determination random number (variable pattern type determination random number (random 2)) and a plurality of types of variable display patterns extracted when one right is stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means A determination value assigned to each of the first reserved storage unit and the second reserved storage unit is different depending on the number of rights stored when the variable display is started. The variable display pattern is determined using a value table (a portion for executing steps S214A and S214B in the game control microcomputer 560),
In the determination value table, a common determination value is assigned to the specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of rights stored in the first reserved storage unit and the second reserved storage unit (for example, 10 (a), (b) and FIG. 78, regardless of whether the total pending storage number is 0 to 2 or more than 3, the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach ( A determination value in the range of 230 to 251 is assigned to the super CA2-7 and CA3-4)),
The production control means includes
The variable display determination random number extracted when the game result by the variable display performed according to the one right is determined to be the specific game result by the pre-determining means, or when the one right is stored Based on the coincidence with the common determination value, the pre-reading notice is executed (the part in which the production control microcomputer 100 executes the processes of steps S1841 and 1842),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inconsistency from occurring depending on the number of rights stored in the reserved storage unit when the pre-reading notice is executed based on the determination that the specific variable display pattern is obtained. Further, by varying the variable display time according to the number of rights stored in the holding storage means, it is possible to prevent the situation where the variable display operation rate is reduced as much as possible.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which expands and shows one structural example of a 1st special variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game ball induced | guided | derived to the upper sphere path | route. It is a block diagram which shows the example of a connection with a main board | substrate, various control boards, and an electrical component. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table, a big hit type determination table, and a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits, and the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advantageous state classification table for specifying the upper limit starting frequency | count for each advantageous state. It is a figure which shows a common figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows a common figure change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a normal variable winning ball apparatus opening time determination table. It is a figure which shows the small hit control pattern table. It is a figure which shows one structural example of the small hit control pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of lower big prize opening 60 approach. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the production control main process which CPU126 performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which CPU126 uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows various effect control pattern tables. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st pending | holding memory number display update process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 1st pending | holding display buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd pending | holding memory number display update process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a 2nd pending | holding display buffer. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a reservation notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect after the end of a big hit until the occurrence of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the winning probability table for every small hit type. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 1st small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 2nd small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 3rd small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 4th small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the allocation state of the determination value in the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the judgment value in the fluctuation pattern classification judgment table for deviation when it sees paying attention also to the fluctuation pattern classification including the fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-continuity as a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification judgment table for deviation | shift when it sees paying attention also to the variation pattern classification containing the variation pattern with a pseudo | simulation series.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is driven into this game area.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 4 is provided on the lower surface of the game area. Below the hitting ball supply tray 4, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 6 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 4 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 for firing the hitting ball.

  A variable winning device 40 is provided at a substantially central position in the game area. On the right side of the variable winning device 40, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is information is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). As an example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can change a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. indicate. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. For example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. It only has to be done. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display device. . In addition, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”.

  A normal symbol display device 20 is provided on the left side of the variable winning device 40. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays a normal symbol in a general game in which, for example, the execution condition is that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, when a symbol indicating “−” is displayed as a variable symbol display result of normal symbols, “unusual” is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when a number indicating “7” is displayed as the variable display result of the normal symbol, “per symbol” is displayed.

  Below the variable winning device 40, an ordinary winning ball device 6A, a special variable winning ball device 7, general winning ports 42F, 42L, 42R, and the like are provided. Further, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the game area on the lower right side of the variable winning device 40. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is, for example, an electric tulip type having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 55 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. An accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a lower big prize opening door 61 that is opened and closed by a lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 shown in FIG. Are changed between an open state that is a first state and a closed state that is a second state. Each of the general winning ports 42F, 42L, 42R is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the start opening switch 22A among the start opening switches 22A and 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the start port switch 22A, and the special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed. The first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) is satisfied.

  The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the start opening switch 22B among the start opening switches 22A and 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the start port switch 22B, and the special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. The second start condition (also referred to as second execution condition) is satisfied. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the normal electric accessory solenoid 55 is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position, so that the game ball enters the second start winning opening as compared with the normal open state. It becomes an expansion open state as the 1st guidance state which is easy to do. On the other hand, when the solenoid 55 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball is normally released as the second induction state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. It becomes a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is capable of entering the second start winning opening even in the normal opening state that is the second guiding state, but in the expanded opening state that is the first guiding state. You may comprise so that possibility that a game ball may approach may become low rather than a certain time. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that, in the second guiding state, for example, the second starting winning port is closed so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B constitutes a starting winning apparatus that changes between the first guiding state in which the second starting condition is likely to be satisfied and the second guiding state in which the second starting condition is difficult or not satisfied. To do.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening is provided. However, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning prize are provided. Any of the mouths may be provided with a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  A game ball that has entered the lower large winning opening 60 formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, the lower count switch 28 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the lower count switch 28, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is in the off state, the lower big prize opening door 61 puts the lower big prize opening 60 in the closed state as the first state. On the other hand, when the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is in the ON state, the lower big prize opening door 61 puts the lower big prize opening 60 into the open state as the second state. Thus, the special variable winning ball device 7 constitutes a variable winning device that performs a specific operation that changes between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may be provided with a continuous winning detector which is a detector for establishing a big hit continuation right in accordance with the detection of the game ball (V winning detection). . In this case, once the V prize is detected at the upper part of the continuous prize detector, the game ball is prevented from passing through the continuous prize detector until the lower big prize opening 60 is in the closed state and then opened. A V shutter may be provided. The V shutter only needs to be connected to a V shutter solenoid via a predetermined link mechanism or the like.

  The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 42F is detected by, for example, the first general winning ball switch 27F among the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, and 27R shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 42L is detected by, for example, the general winning ball switch 27L among the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, and 27R shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the general winning opening 42R is detected by the general winning ball switch 27R among the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, 27R shown in FIG. 4, for example. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by any of the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, 27R.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of a configuration example of the variable winning device 40. In the variable winning device 40 of the present embodiment, a first large winning opening door 32 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the variable winning device 40 as a movable member serving as an opening / closing member so as to be slidable. The first big prize opening door 32 is connected to a plunger or the like built in a coil in the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 shown in FIG. 4 via a predetermined link mechanism such as a linkage arm. When the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is in the ON state, the first big prize opening door 32 brings the first big prize opening 31 into the open state as the first state. On the other hand, when the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is in the OFF state, the first big prize opening door 32 puts the first big prize opening 31 in the closed state as the second state. The first grand prize opening door 32 is not limited to the one configured to be slidable, and for example, is configured to be rotatable so that the first big prize opening 31 is in the first state. What is necessary is just to be able to change to the open state which is an open state and a 2nd state. In this way, the variable winning device 40 can execute the starting operation that changes between the first state (open state) advantageous to the player and the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player. It is configured.

  Inside the variable winning device 40, an upper ball path 34 through which game balls can flow down and pass is provided. A doll model 47 including a foot model 51 is provided on the left side of the variable winning device 40. The game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 passes through the upper ball path 34 and then enters one of a plurality of areas, such as the specific area 49 and the normal area 50, and is external to the variable winning apparatus 40. Is discharged. At this time, the game ball that has entered the specific area 49 is detected by the specific area switch 24. That is, the specific area switch 24 detects a game ball that has entered the specific area 49 among a plurality of areas provided in the variable winning device 40. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the variable prize winning device 40 from the first big prize opening 31 opened by the first big prize opening door 32 in the start operation in the small hit gaming state enters the specific area 49. In response to the entry and detection by the specific area switch 24, the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state is controlled.

  A top winning opening 39 is formed at the top of the variable winning device 40. The game ball that has entered the top prize opening 39 is discharged to the back of the game board 2 as it is. At this time, the game ball that has entered the top prize winning opening 39 is detected by the top prize winning ball switch 26 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the winning ball switch 26.

  In FIG. 2A, the first big prize opening 31 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 2B, the first big prize opening 31 is in an open state. Each of the first grand prize winning ports 31 is an opening that allows communication between the inside and outside of the variable winning device 40. When the first big winning port 31 is in an open state as shown in FIG. It can enter from the outside to the inside. A game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 from the first big prize opening 31 is detected by the upper count switch 23 provided at the inlet to the upper ball path 34 and then the upper ball path from the inlet. 34. Based on the detection of game balls by the upper count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this embodiment, a prize ball is given according to the detection by the upper count switch 23, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball by the outlet switch 25 described later. You may make it give a prize ball according to detection of.

  FIGS. 3A and 3B are views showing the flow of the game ball guided to the upper ball path 34. As shown in FIG. 2A and FIGS. 3A and 3B, a doll model 47 is provided near the upper sphere path 34 as an example of a decorative model. A foot model 51 is attached to the doll model 47 as an example of a movable member serving as a sorting member. The foot model 51 is connected to a plunger or the like built in the coil of the model solenoid 52 shown in FIG. 4 via a predetermined link mechanism or the like. Note that the model solenoid 52 may be connected to an ornament model attached to the doll model 47 and operated in conjunction with the foot model 51.

  When the model solenoid 52 is in the OFF state, as shown in FIG. 3A, the foot model 51 is held above the path of the game ball so as not to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34. The At this time, the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34 is guided so as to be distributed to the lower stage 35 without contacting the foot model 51. On the other hand, when the model solenoid 52 is in the ON state, as shown in FIG. 3B, the foot model 51 moves downward and comes into contact with the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34. At this time, the game ball that has flowed down the upper ball path 34 is guided so as to contact the foot model 51 and be distributed to the lower ball path 36.

  Note that the game ball that has entered the normal area 50 is not detected by the specific area switch 24 but is detected by the discharge port switch 25 when discharged from the variable winning device 40. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the specific area 49 is detected by the discharge port switch 25 when it is discharged from the variable winning device 40 after being detected by the specific area switch 24.

  In the winning space of the variable winning device 40, the image display device 5 is disposed, for example, on the back surface of the variable winning device 40. The image display device 5 may be any device that performs screen display by a dot matrix method using a large number of pixels (pixels) such as a liquid crystal display (LCD). The image display device 5 is formed with a display area for displaying effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, the design symbol variable display divided into three in correspondence with the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The display unit variably displays a plurality of types of effect symbols (also referred to as decoration symbols) that can be identified, and the first reserved memory number as the number of effective approaching balls that have entered the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball The second reserved memory number as the effective approaching ball number that has entered the device 6B is displayed. This variable display of the effect symbols is also included in the variable display game performed based on the start condition being satisfied.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol variable display portions are arranged, and the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A and the second special symbol display device 4 </ b> B are arranged. Corresponding to the execution of any of the special symbol games, the variable display of the effect symbols is started in each effect symbol variable display section. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started by either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, each of the effect symbol variable display portions “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed. When starting the variable display (for example, switching display or scroll display) of the effect symbols at, and then when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game, "left", "middle", "right" In each effect symbol variable display section of "", the finalized effect symbol that is the result of variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). In addition, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol variable display portions are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. It may be.

  In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect variable display portions in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals “1” to “1”) “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters or symbols and character images, etc. An effect image showing an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other graphic) may be displayed as a changeable design pattern. A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  When the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the display area of the image display device 5, in the effect symbol variable display portions of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest symbol number to the larger symbol. When switching display or scroll display is performed and the effect symbol with the maximum symbol number “8” is displayed, the effect symbol with the minimum symbol number “1” is then displayed. Alternatively, when the effect symbol with the smallest symbol number “1” is displayed by switching display or scrolling from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, the next largest symbol number is “8”. A certain effect design may be displayed. During the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, an image for performing various effect displays such as a notice effect image for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is displayed on the image display device 5. It may be displayed in the area.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved storage display unit 18 (see FIG. 67) that displays the first reserved memory number as the number of effective approaching balls that have entered the normal winning ball device 6A, or a normal variable. There is provided a special symbol start memory display area comprising a second reserved memory display unit 19 (see FIG. 67) for displaying the second reserved memory number as the number of effective approach balls that have entered the winning ball device 6B. Specifically, when the first reserved memory number is incremented by one, one of the display parts corresponding to, for example, blue corresponding to no start winning (for example, the leftmost part toward the blue display part) The display part) is changed to a red display which is a display mode corresponding to the start winning. Further, when 1 is added to the second reserved storage number, one of the display parts that is normally green (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts that are green) is changed to yellow display. On the other hand, when the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1, one of the display parts displayed in red (for example, the rightmost display part among the display parts displayed in red) is returned to blue display. . When the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1, one of the display parts displayed in yellow (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part displayed in yellow) is returned to green display. In this embodiment, as a display mode of the number of reserved memories, a point-like display is used as in the case of the first special symbol reserved memory LED 15A and the second special symbol reserved memory LED 15B described later. The invention is not limited to this. For example, in the special symbol start memory display area, by displaying numbers indicating the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are displayed. A player or the like may be able to recognize the reserved storage number.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the effect symbols. A special symbol variable display area for displaying as identifiable may be provided. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”,“ 「”, “×”, etc. corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “O” and “X”. For example, if the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, “◎” is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display area, and if it is a small bonus symbol, “○” is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. In some cases, “x” may be stopped and displayed.

  Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a first special symbol hold memory LED 15A and a second special symbol hold memory LED 15B are provided. Each of the first special symbol reservation storage LED 15A and the second special symbol reservation storage LED 15B includes, for example, four LEDs. The first special symbol hold memory LED 15A displays the first hold memory number. The second special symbol hold memory LED 15B displays the second hold memory number. Further, above the normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol hold storage LED 15C, a 5-round LED 15D, and a 15-round LED 15E are provided. The normal symbol hold memory LED 15 </ b> C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41. The LED 15D for 5 rounds and the LED 15E for 15 rounds are configured to include, for example, one LED, and are turned on at 5 round big hits or 15 round big hits so that the current big hit state is 5 round big hits or 15 rounds. Notify if it is a big hit.

  These first special symbol hold memory LED 15A, second special symbol hold memory LED 15B, normal symbol hold memory LED 15C, 5 round LED 15D and 15 round LED 15E are all connected to the main board 11, as shown in FIG. The lighting state is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, at the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port 69 into which a game ball that does not win any winning area is taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED is arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, a variable winning device 40, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. For example, the hitting operation handle 30 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle 30 only needs to be provided with a single shot switch for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  In response to the fact that the variable symbol display result becomes the symbol “per symbol” after the normal symbol variable display is started in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20, for example, the solenoid 55 for the ordinary electric accessory is turned on. By turning it on and the like, the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B changes from the normal open state in the vertical position to the expanded open state in the tilted position. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening state is restored.

  A special symbol game (also referred to as a first special symbol game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is a first special symbol display device in which a game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. After the first start condition for executing variable symbol special display at 4A is established, variable symbol special symbol display such as the end of the previous special symbol game or the end of the big hit gaming state is started. Is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied. A special symbol game (also referred to as a second special symbol game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is a second special symbol display in which a game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. After the second start condition for executing the variable display of the special symbol is established in the device 4B, for example, the special symbol such as the end of the previous special symbol game or the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Is started when the second start condition for starting the variable display is established. Thus, the first special symbol display device 4A constitutes the first variable display means for variably displaying the special symbol serving as identification information based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. To do. The second special symbol display device 4B constitutes second variable display means for variably displaying the special symbol serving as identification information based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, for example, after both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the first start condition and the second start condition corresponding to the first start condition and the second start condition are not satisfied. When both the first start condition and the second start condition can be established, the second start condition is established with priority over the first start condition. In addition, winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, “small hit” is obtained as a predetermined display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “off” is obtained. When the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In addition, when the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the game state is controlled to a small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as an example, in the first special symbol display device 4A, the numbers indicating “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5” The symbol is a jackpot symbol, and the symbol indicating “−” is an off symbol. In the second special symbol display device 4B, the number indicating “7” is a big hit symbol, and the numbers indicating “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” are small hit symbols. In the present embodiment, in the second special symbol display device 4B, there is no big symbol or no big symbol and no deviation symbol is provided because there is no deviation, but in the case of providing a deviation, the first special symbol display device 4A. Similarly to the above, the symbol indicating “−” may be removed as a symbol. In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol becomes the first specific display result. Further, in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the second specific display result, and the small hit symbol becomes the second predetermined display result. It becomes.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, in response to the variable symbol display being performed in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the effect symbols is performed. Done. Then, when the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becomes a big hit symbol, as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol game, for example, a predetermined symbol variable display unit of “left”, “middle”, “right” The finalized design symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed. For example, the same effect design such as an alphanumeric character indicating “7” is arranged in each of the effect design variable display sections of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. What is derived and displayed may be included. In addition, when the confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game is a small hit symbol, as a variable display result of the effect symbol, for example, in each effect symbol variable display portion of “left”, “middle”, “right” Thus, the definite effect symbols constituting the predetermined small hit combination are stopped and displayed. In such a small winning combination finalized design symbol, for example, “1”, “3”, and “5” alphanumeric characters indicating “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the production symbol variable display portion are stopped. As in the case of displaying, it is only necessary to include one in which a predetermined combination of effect symbols is derived and displayed.

  In the small hit game state based on the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes the small hit symbol, for example, the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the first big prize opening door 32 in the variable prize winning device 40 is slid to change the first big prize opening 31 from the closed state to the opened state in a predetermined starting manner. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, the first big prize opening 31 is returned to the closed state by, for example, switching the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 from the on state to the off state. The opening / closing operation of the first big winning opening 31 performed in such a small hit gaming state is referred to as a starting operation. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the starting operation for opening and closing the first big winning opening 31 is performed a plurality of times such as once or twice. As described above, the starting operation is performed based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the starting opening switch 22B. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result in the game is the “small hit” that is the second predetermined display result, the first big winning opening 31 in the variable winning device 40 is in a second state which is disadvantageous for the player. After changing from a closed state to an open state which is a first state advantageous to the player, the state is changed again to a closed state which is a second state.

  When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 from the first big winning opening 31 opened by the start operation enters the specific area 49 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the big hit gaming state (7th big hit). In this way, when the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes a small hit symbol, the variable winning device from the first large winning port 31 which is opened by the starting operation. Control corresponding to the big hit gaming state is performed in response to the game ball entering the inside of 40 being detected by the specific area switch 24. On the other hand, when the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B becomes a big hit symbol, it is related to whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area 49. However, control is performed to achieve a big hit gaming state (first to sixth big hits). In this case, the lower big prize opening 60 is opened by the lower big prize opening door 61 provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 without opening the first big prize opening 31 provided in the variable prize winning device 40. A specific operation for opening is started.

  In the big hit game state, it becomes possible to execute a specific operation of a predetermined operation unit as a round game, and the lower big prize opening 60 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state as the second state to the first state. It becomes an open state as a state of. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed after the lower big prize opening door 61 changes the lower big prize opening 60 from the closed state to the opened state, or In response to the occurrence of the number (for example, 10) of winning balls, the operation unit until the lower large winning opening 60 is changed from the open state to the closed state is defined as one round game. In addition, the round maximum value as the maximum number of times that the round game can be repeatedly executed (can be continued) in the big hit game state is determined to be “5” or “15”. Here, in the jackpot gaming state in which the round maximum value is determined to be “15”, more game balls win the lower big prize opening 60 than in the jackpot gaming state in which the round maximum value is determined to be “5”. This makes it possible to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out, which is advantageous for the player. In this way, in the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state that becomes the first specific gaming state as in the case where the maximum round value is determined to be “5”, and the round maximum value is “15” (via the small hit amount) In the case of the seventh big hit, the big hit gaming state that becomes a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state as in the case where it is determined to be substantially 14 times as will be described later) And are included.

  In the big hit game state, the next round game can be executed after the end of each round game other than the final round game that has reached the maximum round value. At this time, the condition for enabling the next round game to be executed is that the game ball has been detected by the lower count switch 28 during the execution of the round game or the V winning detection has been detected by the continuous winning detector. (Round continuation condition) may be used. On the other hand, until the round maximum value is reached, the next round game can be executed after the end of the round game regardless of whether or not the game ball is detected by the lower count switch 28 or the continuous winning detector. Good.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, unlike the normal gaming state or the big hit gaming state, control is made to a short time state (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) as an advantageous state advantageous to the player compared to the normal gaming state. Is done. The normal game state is a specific game state such as a big hit game state, an advantageous state such as a short time (advantage) state, or a game state other than the small hit game state. The probability of “per figure” is controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after power-on as in the case of a system reset). .

  In the short-time (advantageous) state, for example, the probability that the variable display result in the ordinary game is “per normal” is higher than the normal game state, or the variable display result in the ordinary game is “per normal”. When the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the expanded open state with the second start winning opening as the first guiding state, the time period and the number of times increase from the normal gaming state. The variable display time from the start of variable display of a symbol until the variable display result is stopped and displayed is shorter than in the normal gaming state, any one of these or a combination of all of these For example, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B may be more easily established than in the normal gaming state. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the short time (advantageous) state, the probability of “per normal game” is the same as in the normal game state (FIG. 17), but the variable display time of the normal game is normal game. In addition to being shorter (1 second) than the state (30 seconds), the period during which the movable blade piece is in the expanded open state is extended from 0.1 seconds to 5 seconds (FIGS. 18 and 19). Thus, it becomes advantageous to the player by making it easy to win the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  In the present embodiment, as the short time (advantageous) state, the first advantageous state controlled to the short time state and the second special symbol display described above in the period in which the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is twice. There are two types of short-time (advantageous) states, the second advantageous state in which the special-time game by the device 4B is controlled 10 times, and the second advantageous state that is controlled to the shortest-time state described above. Based on the presence / absence of the advantageous state when controlled to the big hit gaming state and the type (first to fifth) of the big hit that occurred, it is determined whether the advantageous state to be started is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state Then, when the jackpot gaming state ends, the control of the determined first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is started, and the second special symbol display device 4B has the type of the jackpot that has occurred (sixth), Small hit game If the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state by flowing into the specific area 49, the advantageous state to be started is determined based on the winning type (first to fourth) of the first hit state or When the second advantageous state is determined and the jackpot gaming state ends, the control of the determined first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is started. The short time (advantageous) state that has been started is controlled to the big hit game state when it is the short time (advantageous) state, or the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is the upper limit number of times (2 or 10). The control in the short time (advantageous) state is completed in response to reaching (time).

  In other words, in the first advantageous state, there is a possibility that it will be a small hit only twice, that is, there is only two chances that the first big winning opening 31 performed by the small hit will be in the open state. 49 is unlikely to be a big hit by the inflow of game balls into the 49, but in the second advantageous state, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit 10 times, that is, the first big carried out by the small hit Since there are ten chances for the winning opening 31 to be in the open state, there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area 49 and become a big hit.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with various sensors that detect fraudulent acts and fraudulent operations such as a vibration sensor 70, a magnet sensor 71, and a radio wave sensor 72 shown in FIG. As an example, a vibration sensor 70, a magnet sensor 71, and a radio wave sensor 72 are provided on the back surface of the game board 2 corresponding to a predetermined position inside the game area, and illegal activities caused by vibrating the pachinko gaming machine 1, Alternatively, fraudulent acts using radio waves may be detected. The vibration sensor 70 may be provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. The vibration sensor 70 is a vibration caused by an illegal action such as, for example, when a game ball enters the variable winning device 40, the game machine frame 3 is hit to change the movement of the game ball and enter the specific area 49. Is detected. The magnet sensor 71, for example, guides a game ball by a magnetic force to a specific area 49 provided in the variable winning device 40, or a first start winning opening provided in the normal winning ball device 6A or a normal variable winning ball device 6B. A magnet used for cheating such as guiding a game ball with a magnetic force to a second start winning opening provided in the game is detected. For example, the radio wave sensor 72 turns on detection signals output from various switches and detectors such as the start port switches 22A and 22B, the upper count switch 23, the specific area switch 24, and the lower count switch 28 shown in FIG. Detecting radio waves used for fraudulent acts such as

  In addition, in the variable prize winning device 40, the first big prize opening door 32 is opened when the first big prize winning opening 31 is in the open state, and in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, the lower big prize winning door 61 is in the lower big prize. Sensors for operation monitoring are provided at the open position when the mouth 60 is opened, the tilting position when the movable wing piece opens the second start winning opening in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It may be. As an example, the sensor for monitoring the operation of the first grand prize opening door 32 can detect whether the first big prize opening 31 is open or closed by the first big prize opening door 32. . If it is detected that at least one of the first grand prize opening doors 32 is in the open position even though the driving of the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is stopped, What is necessary is just to make it possible to perform error determination on the assumption that any of the big winning openings 31 is illegally opened.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 4 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a signal relay board 13 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. Signals from the switches 21, 22A, 22B, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27F, 27L, 27R, 28 and the sensors 70, 71, 72 provided on the game board 2 are input to the main board 11. The From the main board 11, drive control signals for driving and controlling the solenoids 52, 53, 54, 55 provided in the game board 2 are output.

  In addition, the main board 11 outputs an effect control command as an electric signal for instructing effect control such as image display control, electrical decoration control, and sound effect output control according to the progress of the game. Is transmitted. In addition, the main board 11 outputs a display control signal for controlling the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like. Further, various game information may be transmitted from the main board 11 to a predetermined information terminal board or the like.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 101 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 102 that outputs drive control signals for various solenoids in accordance with commands is mounted.

  The effect control command as a control signal output from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the signal relay board 13. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 and prevents the signal from being input from the signal relay board 13 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the signal relay board 13 side to the main board 11 side.

  The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, and a speaker 8L. , A voice control command used for controlling the voice output from 8R, a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of contents of the effect control commands used in this embodiment, which will be described in detail later. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the leading bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command forms shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 are merely examples, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  As a method of sending the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 one byte at a time through eight parallel signal lines of production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. A game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 106 that performs a control operation according to a program, a game control program, a random number generation program that generates random numbers, and a fixed program. A ROM (Read Only Memory) 105 that stores data and the like, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that provides a work area for the CPU 106, a random number circuit 108, and an input / output port 107 are configured. In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 106 executes a program read from the ROM 105 and uses the RAM 104 as a work area, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The random number circuit 108 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number 0 for determination to determine whether to win or not based on the display result of variable symbol special display. is there. The random number circuit 108 updates numerical data according to a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 108 selects and sets a numeric data update range selection function (initial value selection and setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection and setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 108. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 105. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 108. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 108 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 100 reads out the numerical data as random 0 from the random number circuit 108 when a start winning to the start port switches 22A and 22B occurs, and specifies based on the random 0 when the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol starts. It is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a display result, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 104 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 104 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (the value of the special symbol process flag or the total pending storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 104 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 100. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 100 or the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 100 or the like becomes operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 100 or the like becomes inoperative. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 100 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random values other than random 0 used on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, random numbers 1 to 5 are used on the main substrate 11 side, and control is performed so that numerical data indicating these random number values can be counted. The In order to enhance the gaming effect, random numbers other than these may be used on the main board 11 side. These random numbers 1 to 5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 106 or may be updated by the random number circuit 108. The random number circuit 108 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 106 executes a program read from the ROM 105 and uses the RAM 104 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 106 can generate all the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 105 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 105 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and type tables shown in FIGS. 11 to 20 prepared for the CPU 106 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, the ROM 105 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 106 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variations of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 105 includes, for example, a hit determination table 130a, a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a, a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b, and a small hit type determination table shown in FIG. (For the second special symbol) 131c, variation pattern type determination table 132a, 132b for big hits, variation pattern type determination table 132c for small hits shown in FIG. 12, variation pattern type determination tables 135a-135b for loss shown in FIG. FIG. 14 shows the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137a and 137b, the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138a shown in FIG. 15, the advantageous state type table 142 shown in FIG. 16, the common chart display result determination table 143 shown in FIG. Common figure variation pattern determination table 144, FIG. Average variable winning ball device open time determination table 145 shown in, contains such Koatari control pattern table 146 shown in FIG. 20. Details of each table will be described later.

  The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 4 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound effect output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. Various production operations such as operations are controlled in accordance with production control commands from the main board 11. As an example, the effect control board 12 includes an effect control microcomputer 120, a display control unit 121, a sound control unit 122, and a lamp control unit 123.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The production control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and provides a CPU 126 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 125 that stores production control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the CPU 126. RAM 124 and an input / output port 127 are provided. In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 126 executes a program read from the ROM 125 and uses the RAM 124 as a work area, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the image display device 5 or the like. In addition, the CPU 126 can generate various random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 12 as necessary by executing a random number generation program stored in the ROM 125. There is no limitation, and a random number circuit for updating numerical data indicating random number values may be provided independently of the random number generation program independently of the random number generation program. By counting numerical values, even if a hardware circuit such as a random number circuit malfunctions, random number values can be continuously counted by software updates, preventing various effects from becoming fixed. it can. When a failure occurs in the CPU 126 itself, the progress of the performance operation itself in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes uncontrollable, so that the failure occurrence can be immediately recognized.

  The ROM in the effect control microcomputer 120 stores a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 47 and various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 48, as will be described later. In these various effect control pattern tables 182, the CPU 126 performs the effect control in the effect control microcomputer 120 during the period from the time when the special symbol variable display is started until the final symbol that is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the contents of various effect controls such as setting contents, contents of display control of the image display device 5, contents of sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R, contents of lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LED, etc. A plurality of types of production control patterns may be stored in association with production control pattern codes that can specify the production control pattern.

  Each production control pattern is composed of various data for controlling the production operation, such as production control process timer setting value, production control process timer determination value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, end code, and the like. The contents of various effect controls such as the display contents of the image display device 5, the sound output contents from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting effect contents of the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED, and the timing control switching timing. Etc. are set.

  In the present embodiment, as the effect control pattern, in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special display game corresponding to the big hit or the small hit is displayed in FIG. 47 corresponding to the various variation patterns shown, an effect control pattern used for a 5-round jackpot effect, an effect control pattern used for a 15-round jackpot effect, and a game in a specific area 49 An effect control pattern and the like used for the effect of 14 rounds big hit when a ball flows in and wins a V prize is prepared.

  Furthermore, as the effect control pattern used during the period in which the game is controlled in the big hit game state, a different display can be performed at the start of the big hit for each of the round maximum values “5”, “14” (V winning), and “15”. As described above, the hit start CST1-1 to the hit start CST3-1 are prepared, and the hit end CED1-1 to the hit start CED3-32 are prepared so that different displays can be performed at the end of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the effect control pattern used at the end of the big hit gaming state, different effect control patterns, hit end CED1-1 (first advantageous state), corresponding to the type of the advantageous state after the big hit, Hit end CED1-2 (second advantageous state), hit end CED2-1 (first advantageous state), hit end CED2-2 (second advantageous state), hit end CED3-1 (first advantageous state), hit end CED 3-2 (second advantageous state) is prepared. Thereby, the effect display of a different aspect can be performed according to the classification of the advantageous state which transfers after a big hit with the classification of each round.

  The RAM 124 of the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 6 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the RAM 124 stores an effect control flag setting unit that stores data for setting a plurality of types of flags that are set or cleared in accordance with the effect operation state, the effect control command, and the like, and various effects used for effect control. An effect control timer setting unit in which data indicating the timer value is stored, an effect control counter setting unit in which data indicating various count values used for effect control is stored, and various data used in effect control are temporarily stored It suffices if an area to be various data setting units such as an effect control buffer setting unit to be stored is provided.

  The input / output port 127 is an input port for capturing various signals such as a rendering control command transmitted to the rendering control microcomputer 120 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the rendering control microcomputer 120. It is comprised including. For example, a display control signal transmitted to the display control unit 121 and an information signal transmitted to the sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 are output from the output port of the input / output port 127.

  The display control unit 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for controlling the display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 based on a display control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, the display control unit 121 performs control for executing the variable display of the effect symbols and various effect displays by causing the effect image to be switched and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The display control unit 121 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The sound control unit 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 controls the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the sound effect signal as the information signal input from the game control microcomputer 120. In the lamp control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12, the lighting operation by the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is controlled in accordance with an electrical decoration signal as an information signal input from the game control microcomputer 120. Is called. The sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 may be configured to be mounted on a control board provided separately from the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 106) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 106 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 106 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 106 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 106 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 106 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 106 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 106 performs data check on the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 106 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 105 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 104) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, advantageous state flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 106 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In this embodiment, the CPU 106 also transmits to the effect control board 12 a total pending storage number designation command in which the value of the total pending storage number counter stored in the backup RAM is set in step S43.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 106 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 104 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for determination per ordinary symbol) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 105 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags that are selectively processed according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 106 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted). An initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 has executed initialization processing). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the initialization control microcomputer 120 receives the initialization designation command, the image display device 5 performs screen display for informing that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 106 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 108 (step S14). For example, the CPU 106 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to make settings for causing the random number circuit 108 to update the random 0 value.

  In step S15, the CPU 106 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 106 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol (decorative symbol) variably displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using a random number. However, it is the production control microcomputer 120 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 106 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 106 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, via the switch circuit 101, the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22A, the start port switch 22B, the upper count switch 23, the specific area switch 24, the discharge port switch 25, the top winning ball switch 26, the general winning ball switch 27F, The detection signals of 27L and 27R and the lower count switch 28 are input and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 106 selects the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first special symbol hold memory LED 15A, the second special symbol hold memory LED 15B, and the normal symbol hold memory LED 15C. Display control processing for performing display control is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 106 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 106 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the lower special winning opening 60 in a predetermined order. The CPU 106 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 106 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 20 in a predetermined order. The CPU 106 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  In addition, CPU 106 performs a process of sending an effect control command to effect control microcomputer 120 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 106 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 106 sets the number of winning balls based on detection signals from the starting port switch 22A, the starting port switch 22B, the upper count switch 23, the top winning ball switch 26, the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L and 27R, and the lower count switch 28. A prize ball process is performed (step S30). Specifically, the winning opening is based on any one of the starting opening switch 22A, the starting opening switch 22B, the upper count switch 23, the top winning ball switch 26, the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, 27R, and the lower count switch 28 being turned on. In response to the detection, a payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. Is output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 106 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of a special symbol in an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, when the start speed set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 106 sets the end flag until the end flag is set. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 106 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 106 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the normal symbol change speed is such that the display state is switched every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag related to the change of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 106 sets 0. Every time 2 seconds elapse, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “7” and 0 indicating “−”) is switched. In addition, the CPU 106 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display device 20 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed in the main process. It may be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the image display device 5, the variable symbol display state is changed after the variable symbol display is started. There is a case where a combination of predetermined production symbols that do not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “ordinary shift” or “non-reach shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the image display device 5, the variable symbol display state is changed after the variable symbol display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed.

  When “1” to “4” which are small hits are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, after the effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined small hit symbol ( For example, the chance symbol “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the image display device 5 corresponding to the stop special display of “1” to “4” as the small hit symbols on the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to the number of times that the lower big prize opening 60 is opened less than the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), and the variable prize is received. The first big prize opening door 32 of the device 40 is slid by the starting operation to open the first big prize opening 31, so that the game ball can enter the variable prize winning device 40.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are shown as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed twice. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed three times. Furthermore, re-variation is performed three times also in the case of using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2- Variation patterns of 3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to superPA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, and special PG1 to special PG3 are prepared. In FIG. 9, the variation patterns of special PG1 to special PG3 are variation patterns used when the second special symbol is a small hit symbol. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 9, when using normal PB2-3 among the fluctuation patterns used when not a small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-continuous, the re-variation is performed twice. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed three times. Furthermore, the re-variation is performed three times also when the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 are used among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuous. Further, for the variation pattern of the special PG 3 used in the case of small hits and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of variation pattern (for example, when there is no non-reach reduction, it is fixed at 5.75 seconds). In the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream, the variation time is fixed at 32.75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds) However, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, the variation time may be varied depending on the total number of pending storage. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of hits (large hits 1-6, small hits 1-4 described later) (for hit type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The variation pattern included in the type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reams, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of less than two re-variations, You may divide into the variation pattern classification containing the variation pattern of 3 times of re-variation. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of the fourth to sixth big hits which are 15 round big hits, normal CA3-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied only by normal reach, normal reach and pseudo They are classified into normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with ream, and super CA3-3 and super CA3-4, which are variation pattern types with super reach. Also, in the case of the first to third big hits that are five round big hits, the normal CA3-1 that is the fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation patterns with only the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation patterns with the normal reach and the pseudo-ream It is classified into normal CA3-2 which is a type and super CA3-4 which is a variation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and three re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by a random number circuit 108 (which may be hardware outside the game control microcomputer 100) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table 130a. The hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 105 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with random 0 is set. In the hit determination table, the special symbol pointer to be described later is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target, and the special symbol pointer to be described later is the second, that is, the second special symbol. For each of the cases where the symbol is a variable display target, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set. The numerical value described in FIG. 11A is the hit determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the special symbol pointer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set. When the first special symbol is subject to variable display, only the big win can be won, and no small win is generated.

  When the special symbol pointer is second, the same determination value as that when the special symbol pointer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Even if it is a target, a big hit (sixth big hit; so-called direct hit big hit) will occur with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and other than the judgment value corresponding to these big hits Since all the judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, there is no losing and all but the big hits are won for the small hits. It is like that.

  That is, the CPU 106 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 108 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the hit determination random number (random 0). If it matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. Further, if the hit determination random number (random 0) matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 11A, the special symbol is set to the small hit (small hits 1 to 4 described later). To decide. The “probability” shown in FIG. 11A indicates the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  FIGS. 11B and 11C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b stored in the ROM 105. FIG. Of these, FIG. 11 (b) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed). It is a table. FIG. 11 (c) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). It is a table.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine the jackpot type from the first jackpot to the sixth jackpot based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the big hits. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a includes five types of big hits from the first big hit to the fifth big hit. In contrast, the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b is provided with only one type of big hit, the sixth big hit. That is, the big hit that occurs when the first special symbol is displayed is one of five types of big hits from the first big hit to the fifth big hit, while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The only big hit that occurs when the player is hit is the sixth big hit.

  In the big hit type determination table 131a, for each of the first big hit to the fifth big hit, a random number (random 1) decision value, definite special symbol ("1" to "5") data, round number ( 5R, 15R) data and data indicating whether to enter the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after the big hit depending on whether the advantageous state flag is in the off state or the on state are set.

  Specifically, by setting five rounds in the round number data corresponding to the first big hit to the third big hit, the first big hit, the second big hit, and the third big hit are set as the five round big hits, By setting 15 rounds in the round number data corresponding to 4 big hits and 5 big hits, the 4th big hit and the 5th big hit are set to 15 round big hits. In other words, the player can acquire more game balls than the first big hit, the second big hit, and the third big hit by being the fourth big hit and the fifth big hit.

  Further, in the normal gaming state in which the advantageous state flag is in the off state (the state where it is not set), only when the third and fifth big hits are made, the advantageous state after the big hit becomes the second advantageous state. The first, second and fourth big hits are set to the first advantageous state, and in the advantageous state where the advantageous state flag is in the on state (the set state), the first advantageous state is set only when the second big hit is made, All other jackpots are in the second advantageous state.

  In other words, the fifth big hit is a big hit of 15 rounds in which a lot of game balls can be acquired, and regardless of the gaming state, it becomes the second advantageous state and is highly likely to become a big hit even after the big hit. Therefore, the number of determination values of the corresponding hit type determination random number (random 1) is 10, and the second jackpot is a five-round jackpot that can acquire a relatively small number of game balls, regardless of the gaming state. Since it is a big hit that is less likely to become a big hit even after a big hit, the corresponding random number for random type determination (random 1) is set to 100. The number of determination values in the present embodiment is 70 for the first big hit, 100 for the second big hit, 90 for the third big hit, 30 for the fourth big hit, and 10 for the fifth big hit. 2> 3> 1> 4> 5 In this order, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of determination values may be set as appropriate in consideration of game playability. good.

  As described above, in the first special figure game, in the normal game state, the ratio of winning the first, second, and fourth jackpots controlled to the first advantageous state after the jackpot game state ends is 2/3, and the jackpot game state The ratio of winning the third and fifth big hits controlled to the second advantageous state after the end of is 1/3. On the other hand, in the advantageous gaming state, the ratio of winning the second big hit, which is controlled to the first advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state, is 1/3. The winning percentage per 1, 2, 4, 5 is 2/3. Therefore, after the big hit in the advantageous state is finished, the advantageous state is usually set to the second advantageous state at a higher rate (2/3) than after the big hit in the normal gaming state (1/3). It is more advantageous for the player than the gaming state.

  In the big hit type determination table 131b, for the sixth big hit, determination values “0” to “299” of random numbers (random 1) for hit type determination, definite special symbol (“7”) data, and round number (15R) data Regardless of whether the advantageous state flag is off or on, data indicating the second advantageous state is set. That is, if the second special symbol is a direct hit big hit, it becomes the sixth big hit, and a big hit game of 15R is given as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, it always becomes the second advantageous state.

  FIG. 11D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131 c stored in the ROM 105. This small hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131c uses a holding memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table | surface in the case of determining the type of a small hit when the occurrence of a small hit is determined. That is, when it is determined that the small hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131c and the variable display result is the small hit symbol, the small hit type is determined based on the random number (random 1) for determining the hit type. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the first small hits to the fourth small hits.

  In the small hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131c, for each of the first small hit to the fourth small hit, a determination value of a random number (random 1) for determining the hit type, a fixed special symbol ("1") ~ "4") data, small hit control pattern data including an opening pattern by the start operation of the first big prize opening door 32 of the variable winning device 40 by small hit, by the game ball flowing into the specific area 49 by small hit Data on the number of rounds of big hits to be generated and data indicating whether to enter the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after big hits are set depending on whether the advantageous state flag is off or on. .

  Specifically, for all the small hits, when the seventh big hit that is 15 round number data (actually 14 rounds) is set, the game ball flows into the specific area 49 by the small hit Is a seventh big hit, and 15 rounds (substantially 14 rounds) of big hit games are awarded.

  Further, in the normal gaming state in which the advantageous state flag is in the off state (the state where it is not set), when the third small hit and the fourth small hit are made, the short time (advantageous) state after the seventh big hit Is set to be the second advantageous state, and when the first small hit and the second small hit are made, the short time (advantageous) state after the seventh big hit is set to be the first advantageous state. In the short time (advantageous) state in which the flag is on (set), the short time (advantageous) state after the seventh big hit is the first short hit and the third small hit. When the second advantageous state is reached and the second small hit and the fourth small hit are obtained, the short time (advantageous) state after the seventh big hit is set to be the first advantageous state.

  Each small hit control pattern is set so that the opening time and the number of opening times of the first big prize opening door 32 are different and the driving timing and driving time of the model solenoid 52 are different (see FIGS. 70 to 73). Thus, as shown in FIG. 69, the probability that a game ball flows into the specific area 49 and becomes a big hit differs depending on the type of the small hit, and as will be described later, the third small hit is the most specific area. 49 is a pattern in which game balls are likely to flow (probability of about 90%), and the second small hit is a pattern in which game balls are most difficult to flow into the specific area 49 (probability of about 5%).

  That is, in the third small hit, the probability that a game ball flows into the specific area 49 and becomes a big hit is as high as about 90%. After the big hit, regardless of the game state, the second advantageous state is set. The number of judgment values of the random number (Random 1) is 30, and the probability of the first small hit is about 20% when the game ball flows into the specific area 49 and becomes a big hit, and only after the big hit in the advantageous state. 2 is in an advantageous state, and the number of determination values of the corresponding random number for random determination (random 1) is 120. On the other hand, in the second small hit, the probability that the game ball flows into the specific area 49 and becomes a big hit is as low as about 5%. After the big hit, regardless of the gaming state, the first advantageous state is set. The random number (random 1) is 110, and the fourth hit has a probability that a game ball will flow into the specific area 49 and become a big hit, and the first hit is only after the big hit in the advantageous state. The number of determination values of the random number (random 1) for determining the corresponding hit type is 40. In other words, the probability of occurrence is in the order of first> second> fifth> fourth, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of determination values is appropriately determined in consideration of game playability. Should be set.

  As described above, in the second special game, in the normal gaming state, the ratio of winning the first and second jackpots controlled to the first advantageous state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is 23/30, and the jackpot gaming state is terminated. The winning ratio for the third and fourth jackpots that are later controlled to the second advantageous state is 7/30. On the other hand, in the advantageous gaming state, the winning ratio for the second and fourth big hits controlled to the first advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state is ½, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, the ratio is controlled to the second advantageous state. The ratio of winning the 1st and 5th big wins is 1/2. Therefore, after the end of the big hit in the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (1/2) than after the big hit in the normal gaming state (7/30). Since the small win is won, the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  Also, after the end of the jackpot in the advantageous state in the second special figure game, at a higher rate (1/2) than after the big hit in the normal game state in the first special figure game (1/3), After winning the big hit gaming state, the small win controlled by the second advantageous state having a longer advantageous period that is controlled to the advantageous state than the first advantageous state is won, so there is a possibility that the big hit will be again after the advantageous state ends. Not only is it high, but it is highly likely that the second advantageous state will be obtained even after the end of the big hit, that is, since the continuation rate of the second advantageous state is high, it can be expected that big hits will be generated continuously.

  Here, the playability will be described from the ratio of random 1. In the first advantageous state, the second special figure game has two chances, that is, the chance to become the small hit gaming state, and in the second advantageous state, the second There are 10 special chance games, that is, 10 chances to enter the small hit gaming state. In the following explanation, it will be described as the probability of occurrence of a big hit when it is assumed that the game is a small hit in the second special figure game and the game ball enters the variable winning device 40 in the small hit game state. Actually, a game ball does not always enter due to obstacle nails or hitting balls.

  First, since the probability of winning the third small hit in the second special figure game is about 1/10, the probability of occurrence of the third small hit in the first advantageous state is about 0.2. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence in the second advantageous state is about once. The probability that a game ball flows into the specific area 49 at the third small hit and is a big hit is as high as about 90%. The probability that a big hit will be triggered by the third small hit in the second advantageous state is about 90%.

  In addition, since the probability of winning the first small hit in a second special figure game is about 2/5, the probability of occurrence of the first small hit in the first advantageous state is about 0.8. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence in the second advantageous state is about 4 times. The probability that a game ball flows into the specific area 49 at the first small hit and is a big hit is about 20%. Therefore, the probability of a big hit triggered by the first small hit in the first advantageous state is about 16%. The probability that a big hit will be triggered by the first small hit in the second advantageous state is about 80%.

  On the other hand, since the probability of winning the fourth small hit in the second special figure game is about 2/15, the probability of occurrence of the fourth small hit in the first advantageous state is about 0.3. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence in the second advantageous state is about 1.3 times. The probability that a game ball flows into the specific area 49 at the fourth small hit and becomes a big hit is about 50%, so the probability that a big hit is triggered by the fourth small hit in the first advantageous state is about 13.3%. In the second advantageous state, the probability that a big hit is triggered by the fourth small hit is about 66.6%.

  In addition, since the probability of winning the second small hit in the second special figure game is about 11/30, the probability of occurrence of the second small hit in the first advantageous state is about 0.7. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence in the second advantageous state is about 3.6 times. And since the probability that a game ball flows into the specific area 49 at the second small hit and becomes a big hit is as low as about 5%, the probability of a big hit triggered by the second small hit in the first advantageous state is about 3.6%. In the second advantageous state, the probability that a big hit will be triggered by the second small hit is about 18.3%.

  Thus, in the first advantageous state, the probability that a big hit will occur when triggered by the first small hit is about 16%, the probability that a big hit will occur when triggered by the second small hit is about 3.6%, and the third small hit The probability that a big hit will occur at the opportunity of about 18% and the probability of a big hit at the fourth small hit will be about 13.3%, while in the second advantageous state, the chance at the first small hit will be the opportunity. The probability of a big hit is about 80%, the probability of a big hit when the second small hit is about 18.3%, the probability of a big hit when the third small hit is about 90%, the fourth small hit The probability that a big hit will occur at the opportunity of about 66.6%, the second advantageous state of the second special figure game is 10 times higher than the first advantageous state of the second special figure game twice. In the advantageous state, it becomes a big hit gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the second advantageous state, the probability of a big hit (about 80%) triggered by the first small hit that becomes the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state after the big hit gaming state, and the third small hit On the other hand, the average value of the sum total of the probability (about 90%) that the jackpot will be generated is about 85%. Since the average value of the sum of the probability of occurrence of a big hit (about 18.8.3%) and the probability of a big hit at the fourth small hit (about 66.6%) is about 42.4%, When a big hit is made in the advantageous state, it is easier to shift to the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

  In addition, the average probability of becoming a big hit gaming state with the first to fourth small hits in the first advantageous state is about 12.7%, while the big hit with the first to fourth small hits in the second advantageous state Since the average probability of being in the gaming state is about 63.7%, the second advantageous state is higher than the ratio of becoming the big hit gaming state with the first to fourth small hits as a trigger in the first advantageous state. The big hit gaming state is triggered by the 4 small hits.

  In other words, if the second advantageous state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, a big hit is triggered by the first and third small hits in the second advantageous state. We can expect to be in an advantageous state.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure game is executed twice in the first advantageous state or when the special figure game is executed ten times in the second advantageous state, the maximum number of second reserved memories is four. The second special game based on the reserved memory even if the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is ended and there is a reserved memory in the second reserved memory number at that time even after the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state ends. Therefore, there is a maximum of 6 chances when controlled to the first advantageous state, and a maximum of 14 chances when controlled to the second advantageous state.

  That is, when the second special figure game is finished for the second time without a big hit in the first advantageous state or when the second special figure game is finished for the tenth time without a big hit in the second advantageous state. However, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more at this time, the second special figure game corresponding to the second reserved memory number is executed after the advantageous state ends. However, since the advantageous state ends, the number of reserved memories hardly increases during the execution period of the second special figure game based on one reserved memory.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit is generated only for the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit is also generated for the first special symbol. In addition, the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is suddenly established without the big hit by setting the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after the small hit according to the type of occurrence of the small hit. You may make it become.

  12A to 12C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132a and 132b and the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132c. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132a and 132b change the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2). Further, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132c determines the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the small hit type when the variable display result is determined to be the small hit symbol. This table is referred to for determination based on a random number (random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132a and 132b includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3 to super CA3-4 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132a shown in FIG. 11 (a) used when the big hit type is the first big hit to the third big hit, that is, the fifth round big hit, and the big hit type is the fourth big hit to the sixth big hit. That is, the determination value for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-4 with the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132b shown in FIG. The assignment is different. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132b is assigned a decision value for the super CA3-3, whereas the big hit variation pattern type decision table 132a has a decision value for the super CA3-3. Is not assigned.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132a and 132b selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b), in this embodiment, the random pattern (random 2) value for determining the variation pattern type is 150˜ If it is 251, it will be understood that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  The variation pattern type determination table 132c for small hits is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, and is determined when the big hit such as special CA4-1. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no value is assigned. Therefore, when the small display state is controlled according to the variable display result being “small hit”, the variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of controlling the big hit state. In the present embodiment, all the values that can be taken by random 2 as the determination values are set as the determination values, and when the small hit is made, all the special CA4-1 variation patterns are selected. It has become.

  FIGS. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135a to 135b. Among these, FIG. 13 (a) shows the variation pattern type determination table 135a for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state) and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 13B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135b for loss that is used when the gaming state is a short time (advantageous) state or the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135a to 135b have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 shows a case where the common variation pattern type determination table 135b is used for the case where the gaming state is the short-time (advantageous) state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, a separate variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case where the time is short (advantageous) and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Furthermore, a plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for loss of time.

  In this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135a used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135b used when the total pending storage number is 3 or more are two. Although the case where only the type table is used is shown, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of values other than the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of pending storages. However, a deviation variation pattern type determination table according to the first and second pending storage numbers. A plurality of may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. .

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135a to 135b includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), in this embodiment, in the case of a deviation, if the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251 in the game, It can be seen that, regardless of the state and the total number of pending storages, variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, a case where a common loss variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown, but the current gaming state is in a short time (advantageous) state. Depending on whether there is a normal gaming state or not, a big hit variation pattern type determination table or a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 13B. However, the total number of pending storages (the first number of pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state is shown. The threshold value may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3, (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example) The variation pattern type determination table for misalignment is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined, and when the gaming state is the short-time (advantageous) state, 2 (or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is smaller 0 or 1), the shortening variation pattern type determination table is selected and the variation pattern of the shortening variation is selected. May be determined.

  14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137a to 137b stored in the ROM 105. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137a to 137b determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137a to 137b is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137a is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 to super CA3-4. The hit variation pattern determination table 137b is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is the special CA4-1. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137a to 137b is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the variation pattern type includes a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo-ream. There is a case where classification is made into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 and a super CA 3-4 which are fluctuation pattern types including a fluctuation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach). It is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 14B, the variation pattern type may be classified into only the special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the special PG2 that is a non-reach shortened variation pattern. It is shown. In FIG. 14B, not only the special CA 4-1 type, but a reach type other than the special CA 4-1 is provided, and these types are distributed by random 2. good. Further, the variation pattern types may be classified according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138 a stored in the ROM 105. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138a is based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The outlier variation pattern determination table 138a is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an advantageous state type table 142 stored in the ROM 105. In the advantageous state type table, the upper limit of the second special symbol that is a period in which the gaming state is set to the advantageous state in which the time reduction control is performed in association with the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, which are the advantageous state types. In this embodiment, the upper limit fluctuation number of “2 times” is set corresponding to the first advantageous state, and the upper limit fluctuation number of “10 times” is set corresponding to the second advantageous state. Is set.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a general map display result determination table 143 stored in the ROM 105. The common map display result determination table 143 is a table that is referred to for determining whether the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the general game is “per normal map” or “unusual”. For example, the general map display result determination table 143 is configured from setting data (determination data) for associating (allocating) the random value random number 4 for general map display result determination with the determination value data for each normal map, the deviation determination value data, or the like. Has been.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a universal variation pattern determination table 144 stored in the ROM 105. The normal pattern variation pattern determination table 144 is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern (ordinary pattern variation pattern) from the start of variable display of the normal symbol to the stop display of the fixed normal symbol in the general game. It is. For example, the normal pattern change pattern determination table 144 sets the normal map change time, which is the time from the start of variable display of a normal symbol to the display of a fixed normal symbol after the variable symbol is started. Whether the normal map display result, which is the display result type in the game, is “winning” or “out of”, whether the advantageous state flag is on (set) / off (not set), that is, the short-time (advantageous) state or normal It is composed of setting data (determination data) for determining corresponding to each gaming state. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of variation patterns that become normal variation patterns, a variation pattern a (variation time 30 seconds) corresponding to the “win” in the normal gaming state, and a variation pattern b corresponding to the “out of” state in the normal state. (Variation time 30 seconds), fluctuation pattern c (variation time 1 second) corresponding to “short” in the short time (advantageous) state, and fluctuation pattern d (variation time 1 second) corresponding to the “out of” advantageous state A pattern is available.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a public power release pattern table 145 stored in the ROM 105. In the ordinary train opening pattern table 145, the ordinary variable variable display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game is “per ordinary diagram”, so that the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 55 forms the second start winning opening. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the period during which the winning ball device 6B is in the expanded and open state as the ordinary power release pattern. As an example, the public power release pattern table 145 stores two types of normal power release patterns. The general electric release pattern FA1 is a pattern that is selected corresponding to a case in which the normal map display result is determined as “per normal map” when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state. The public train release pattern FA2 is a pattern that is selected in response to the fact that the base map display result is determined to be “per base map” when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the short time (advantageous) state. .

  Specifically, in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1, as shown in FIG. 19, the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is set to the second start winning opening by turning on the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 55. The expanded opening time, which is the time for the expanded opening state, is set to “0.1 second”. In the general electric operation pattern FA2, the expansion opening time is set to “5 seconds”. By such setting, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous in the short time (advantageous) state, the period during which the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state is longer than in the normal time in the normal gaming state, This makes it easier for game balls to enter the second grand prize opening.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit control pattern table 146 stored in the ROM 105. In the small hit control pattern table 146, the setting contents in the game control microcomputer 100 by the CPU 106 during the period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of the drive operation in the model solenoid 52 and the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 as the small hit control pattern. As an example, the small hitting control pattern table 146 stores four types of small hitting control patterns KP1 to KP4 corresponding to each of the four types of small hitting types including the first small hitting to the fourth small hitting. Yes. Each of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 is selected corresponding to the case where the small hit type is determined for each of the first small hit to the fourth small hit.

  Each of the plurality of types of small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 stored in the small hit control pattern table 146 includes, for example, setting data and control data associated with various determination values as shown in FIG. Series start operations such as setting contents of the game control microcomputer 100 by the CPU 106 and contents of driving operations in the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54, the model solenoid 52, and the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 3 shows various settings, control contents, execution timing, and the like. Note that the small hitting control pattern is not limited to the time series of setting and control contents and execution timing by the CPU 106, and may be listed regardless of the time series. For example, each of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 includes data indicating the timing for generating a drive control signal for the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54, the model solenoid 52, and the first big prize opening door solenoid 53, and driving. The data indicating the timing to stop the output of the control signal may be individually associated with the control data indicating the generation pattern of the drive control signal and the stop command.

  Each determination value shown in the small hit control pattern shown in FIG. 21 (for example, specific winning validity determination value, first large winning opening opening determination value, model solenoid driving determining value # 1, lower large winning opening door solenoid driving) Determination value # 1, model solenoid stop determination value # 1, first large winning opening opening determination value, lower large winning opening door solenoid stop determining value # 1, etc., where # 1 is a plurality of determination values Is provided in the game control timer setting section of the game control data holding area provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the RAM 104. The CPU 106 compares the game control process timer value, which is the timer value in the game control process timer set, with the CPU 106. At this time, if any of the determination values matches the game control process timer value, setting or control according to the setting data or control data associated with the matching determination value is executed. Based on the settings of these small hitting control patterns KP1 to KP4, in the small hitting gaming state, the number of times the lower big winning opening 60 is opened (twice), the opening time (0.1 seconds), etc. are common to each small hitting. In addition, the number of times that the first grand prize winning opening 31 is opened by the starting operation (number of times of starting and opening), the opening time, and the like are stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. As shown in FIG. 70 to FIG. 73, it can be made different depending on the small hitting design.

  FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable symbol special display. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 9, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 120 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 120 ends the variable display (variation display) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 28), the game control microcomputer 100 determines which variation pattern type is to be used when starting a winning. Then, a value for specifying the variation pattern type as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result specifying result command at the time of winning, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed. For example, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 at the start winning to the first start winning opening (non-reach deviation), the EXT data is “00 (H)”. The winning determination result 1 designation command with "" set is transmitted. Also, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 (super reach is off) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A winning determination result 3 designation command is transmitted. Further, for example, when the start winning prize to the first start winning opening is not the non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach) or the super CA2-7 (super-reach), normal CA2-4, normal CA2 -5, when the normal reach is normal CA2-6), a winning determination result 2 designation command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1 or normal CA3-2 (normal reach big hit) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. The set winning determination result 4 designation command is transmitted. Also, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA3-4 (super reach big hit) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A winning determination result 5 designation command is transmitted.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a jackpot start designation 3 designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. The big hit start 1 designation command is a command transmitted in the case of the first big hit to the third big hit, which is a big round 5 big hit, and the big hit start 2 designation command is in the case of the fourth big hit to the sixth big hit, which is a 15 round big hit. The big hit start 3 designation command is a command sent in the case of the seventh big hit that occurs when the game ball flows into the specific area 49 and wins a V in the small hit.

  The command A1XX (H) displays a small hitting start screen including a small winning type and a V winning probability corresponding to the small winning type, that is, an effect control command for specifying the start of the small winning game (small hitting start designation) Command). In the case of the first small hit, a small hit start designation command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. In the case of the second small hit, the small hit in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A hit start specifying command is transmitted. In the case of the third small hit, a small hit start specifying command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. In the case of the fourth small hit, “04” is set in the EXT data. The small hitting start designation command in which (H) is set is transmitted.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big prize opening) indicating the display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the lower big prize opening 60 is being opened. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) indicating the closing of the lower big prize opening 60 of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A401 (H) indicates that a big hit end screen is displayed to notify that the second special symbol which is the first advantageous state is in a short time (advantageous) state up to two times of starting, that is, the end of the big hit game is designated. In addition, it is an effect control command (a big hit end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command) that designates that the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first advantageous state. Command A402 (H) displays a big hit end screen for notifying that the second special symbol which is the second advantageous state is in a short time (advantageous) state up to 10 times of starting, that is, specifying the end of the big hit game In addition, it is an effect control command (a big hit end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command) for designating that the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the second advantageous state. Command A 403 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command: ending 3 specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a time-short (advantageous) state.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of times of the time reduction (advantageous) state (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display is finished). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time-saving (advantageous) states.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number designation command) that designates the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  When the effect control microcomputer 120 (specifically, the CPU 126) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, FIG. 22 and 23, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed via the lamp control unit 123, and the sound number data is sent to the sound control unit 122. Is output.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 100 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display device 4B, and that produces an effect in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control microcomputer 120 from being increased when controlling the effect parts such as the device 5.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 106) mounted on the main board 11. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the lower large winning opening 60, and the variable winning device 40 is executed. In the special symbol process, if the start port switch 22A for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port is turned on, that is, the start winning to the first start winning port is generated. If so, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the start port switch 22B for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port is turned on, that is, if the start winning to the second start winning port has occurred, the CPU 106 A start port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the start port switch 22A or the start port switch 22B is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 100 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 100 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. . In case of big hit, set big hit flag. If it is a small hit, the small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends, and the small hit flag is reset in the pre-start process for the small hit.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is stopped and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 120 controls the image display device 5 to stop the effect symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, the lower big winning opening 60 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the lower big prize opening 60) and the like are initialized, and the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is driven to lower the lower big prize opening 60. Leave it open. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 120, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the lower big prize opening 60, and the like are performed. If the closing condition of the lower big prize opening 60 is satisfied and there are still rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 120 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, an advantageous state flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, a small hit start command corresponding to the type of small hit is transmitted, and a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the lower big prize opening 60 or the variable winning device 40 is entered). The remaining ball counter (counting game balls) is initialized. In addition, the small hit including the timing when the lower big prize opening 60 is opened and closed, the timing when the first big prize opening 31 is opened and closed, the timing when the foot model 51 is operated, and the like. By setting the small hit control pattern corresponding to the type, the operation setting of the small hit gaming state is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). .

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. In the small hit opening process, a control for opening the lower big prize opening 60 and a control for opening the first big prize opening 31 are performed. Specifically, the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is driven to open the lower big prize opening 60 and the first big prize opening 31 is opened. Further, the end of the small hit gaming state is determined by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the display control microcomputer 120 to perform display control for transmitting a small hitting end designation command to notify the player that the small hitting gaming state has ended, and a game is performed in the specific area 49 by small hitting. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered (specific winning determination process). When a game ball enters the specific area 49 at the small hit, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example), while the game ball enters the specific area 49. If not, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 26 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process in step S312. FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process that is executed when the start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number is 4) (step S211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 106 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213A). Next, the CPU 106 extracts values from the random number circuit 108 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 27) (step S214A). . In the process of step S214A, random 0 (random number for hit determination) that is a hardware random number, random number for hit type determination (random 1) that is a software random number, random number for change pattern type determination (random 2), and change pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random number 0 (random number for hit determination) that is a hardware random number, a random number for hit type determination (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern. A random number for type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 104.

  Next, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the big hit data indicating the big hit is stored in the first reserved storage buffer. If the big hit data is stored, that is, the big hit is within the range of the first reserved storage number. In this case, the process proceeds to step S219A without going through step S218A. If the big hit data is not stored, the CPU 106 proceeds to step S216A to check whether or not an advantageous state flag indicating that the gaming state is a short time (advantageous) state is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S219A. If the advantageous state flag is not set, the CPU 106 further checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S217A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 106 proceeds to step S219A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 106 executes a prize-time effect process in which a fluctuation display result when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed is determined in advance at the start prize (step S218A). ). Then, the CPU 106 performs control for transmitting a winning determination result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing, and the first reserved memory number counter subsequent to the winning determination result specifying command. Based on this value, control is performed to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S219A).

  If the winning effect processing in step S218A is not executed because it is determined Yes in step S215A, step S216A, or step S217A, CPU 106 transmits only the first reserved memory number designation command in step S219A. The control to transmit the winning determination result designation command is not performed. If the winning effect processing in step S218A is not executed, a winning determination result specifying command in which a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, when the process of step S215A is executed, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, the big hit data indicating the big hit is not stored in the first holding storage buffer. Only in this case, the winning effect processing in step S218A is executed. As a result, even if there is a first start winning that will be displayed on the first hold storage display unit 18 before, during and after the occurrence of the big hit of the stored big hit data, Since the production process is not executed, even if the variation pattern type corresponding to the first start prize is the variation pattern type that is the target of the pending notice effect (prefetching notice), the pending notice effect is not performed. It becomes like this. In other words, if the first start winning at the stage where the big hit data indicating the big hit is stored in the first hold storage buffer, if the hold notice effect is performed before the big hit occurs, the first big win is held during the big hit that occurs after that. In order not to implement the notice effect, the hold notice effect displayed before the big hit is changed to the normal hold memory display, and the hold notice becomes unnatural. In the first start winning in the stage where the big hit data indicating the big hit is stored in the first holding storage buffer, it is avoided that the holding notice in step S218A is not performed, so that the holding notice becomes unnatural. can do.

  In addition, when the process of step S216A is executed and there is a start winning in the first start winning opening, the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state) (the time is not short (advantageous) state) ) Only at the time of winning a prize in step S218A. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S217A is executed, if there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, the winning of step S218A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A time effect process is executed. As a result, during the short-time (advantageous) state, during the big win, and during the small win, even if there is a start winning, the effect process at the time of winning is not executed. Even if the variation pattern type is the target of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect is not performed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S218A only when the game state is a big hit game state, and the process may be executed at step S218A and the winning effect process may be executed when the game state is a small hit game state.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the number is 4) (step S211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 106 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213B). Next, the CPU 106 extracts values from the random number circuit 108 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 27) (step S214B). ), Control is performed to transmit the second reserved memory number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 based on the value of the second reserved memory number counter (step S219B). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, for the second reserved memory, a second reserved memory buffer is provided, and a random number value is extracted at the time when a start winning is made to the second starting winning opening, By storing the extracted random number value in the second holding storage buffer, even when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening, as in the case where there is a starting winning to the first start winning opening, The determination process at the time of winning can be performed as necessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second reserved storage buffer is not provided, and the extraction of these random values is started to change the special symbol. You may make it implement at the time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the second start opening switch passing process is not performed with the winning determination process, so that the second hold storage display unit 19 does not perform the hold notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second hold storage display unit 19 may perform a hold notice effect similarly to the first hold storage display unit 18.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in step S218A. In the winning effect process, the CPU 106 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random 0) extracted in step S214A with the jackpot determination value shown in the left column corresponding to the first special symbol in FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the big hit type, or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening, before the variation display based on the start winning is started, the effect processing at the time of winning is executed. In advance, it is confirmed which variation pattern type is to be used. By doing so, the variation pattern type is predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, as will be described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer 120 A hold notice effect is implemented in the 1 hold storage display unit 18.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random 0) does not match the jackpot determination value (No in step S220), the CPU 106 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S221). In this embodiment, in step S221, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the gaming state is a short time (advantageous) state (specifically, whether or not an advantageous state flag is set). Further, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (specifically, whether or not the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or more).

  Then, the CPU 106 sets a deviation variation pattern type determination table in accordance with the determination result of step S221 (step S222). Specifically, when the CPU 106 determines that the gaming state is a short-time (advantageous) state or determines that the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. A pattern type determination table (for shortening) 135b is set. If it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state) and the total number of pending storages is less than 3, the deviation variation pattern type determination table (normal) 135a shown in FIG. Set. It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state and the total pending storage number, it is not distinguished which of the variation pattern type determination tables 135a and 135b is used for deviation. The change pattern type determination tables 135a and 135b for use may be selected and set. Also, instead of using the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination is incorporated in advance, and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is larger than the threshold, thereby determining the variation pattern type in step S223 described later. You may make it do. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, determination values are assigned to a common range of 150 to 251 with respect to the variation pattern type of super CA 3-4 that is a super reach big hit. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is greater than or equal to the threshold 150, and if it is greater than or equal to 150, it may be determined that the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4. Good. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the determination value is within a common range of 230 to 251 with respect to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 that is out of super reach. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for random variation pattern determination (random 2) is greater than or equal to the threshold value 230, and if it is greater than or equal to 230, it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7. May be. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the determination value falls within a common range of 1 to 79 with respect to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 that is out of reach. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 79. If the value is 79 or less, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 is determined. You may judge.

  Next, the CPU 106 determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table set in step S223 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in step S214A (step S223).

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 106 saves the jackpot data indicating the jackpot data in addition to the random number value extracted in step S214A. (Step S226).

  Then, the type of jackpot is determined based on the hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in step S214A (step S227). In this case, the CPU 106 uses the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. (4th big hit-5th big hit) "is determined.

  Then, the CPU 106 sets a big hit variation pattern type determination table according to the big hit type determined in step S227 (step S228). Specifically, when the CPU 106 determines “big round big hit”, it sets the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132a shown in FIG. When it is determined that “15 rounds big hit”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132b shown in FIG. 12B is set.

  Next, the CPU 106 determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table set in step S228 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in step S214A (step S229).

  As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), in the case of big hit, the big hit type is “5 round big hit” or “15 round big hit”. Regardless of whether or not there is, a common range of determination values (150 to 251) is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4. Therefore, when “5 rounds big hit” or “15 rounds big hit”, if the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination is 150 to 251, the CPU 106 at least changes the variation pattern type to Super CA 3-4. It can be determined that it becomes (that is, it becomes a super reach big hit).

  Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, in the case of losing, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 regardless of the gaming state and the total number of pending storage. A determination value (1 to 79) in a common range is assigned to. Therefore, in the case of deviation, if the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79, the CPU 106 at least changes the variation pattern type to non-reach CA2-1 (that is, non-reach is out). ) Can be determined. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, in this embodiment, when it is out of place, regardless of the gaming state and the total number of pending storage, A common range of determination values (230 to 251) is assigned. Therefore, in the case of losing, if the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) is 230 to 251, the CPU 106 will at least change the variation pattern type to super CA2-7 (that is, super reach will be deviated). Can be determined.

  Then, the CPU 106 performs processing for setting the determined variation pattern type in the winning determination result designation command (step S224). For example, if “non-reach” is determined in step S223, a process of setting “00 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “95 (H)” is performed. Do. If it is determined in step S224 that “super-reach is lost”, a process of setting “02 (H)” in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of the MODE data “95 (H)” is performed. Do. If neither “non-reach out” nor “super-reach out” is determined in step S224, “01 (” is added to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of the MODE data “95 (H)”. H) ”is set. If it is determined in step S224 that “normal reach big hit”, a process of setting “04 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “95 (H)” is performed. . Further, when it is determined in step S229 that “super reach big hit”, a process of setting “04 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of the MODE data “95 (H)”. Do.

  29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 106 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 106 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 106 displays a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 106 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 106 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 104, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 104 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 106 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 104. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 106 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 104.

  Then, the CPU 106 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 106 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 106 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 104. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 104. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 106 saves the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 104 (step S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). Note that the CPU 106 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 104.

  Further, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (Step S59). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. Or data indicating “second” indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening, that is, data indicating “second” indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The special symbol pointer is set. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 106 reads random 0 (a random number for hit determination) from the random number buffer area, and executes the hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 106 determines the hits that are extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read out and hit determination is performed. The hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 11A) with a random number for hit determination, and if they match, it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes processing. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random 0) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 106 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display device as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  If the value of the hit determination random number (random 0) does not match any of the big hit determination values (No in step S61), the CPU 106 uses the hit determination table (see FIG. 11A) to calculate the small hit value. Perform the determination process. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random 0) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 106 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 106 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the CPU 106 stores the data corresponding to the small hit corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the judgment value. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using a determination value stored in association with the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol. To do. If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62; Yes), the CPU 106 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63) and reads random 1 from the random number buffer area. The small hit type is specified based on the read random 1 and the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 11D) (step S64), and the specified small hit type (first to fourth) is stored in the RAM 104. The small hit type buffer is set (stored) (step S65). For example, when the small hit type is the first small hit type, “01” is set as data indicating the small hit type, and when the small hit type is the second small hit type, “01” is set as the data indicating the small hit type. “02” is set, and when the small hit type is the third small hit type, “03” is set as data indicating the small hit type, and when the small hit type is the fourth small hit type, the small hit type is selected. “04” is set as the data to be indicated. On the other hand, when it is not decided to make a small hit (step S62; No), the process proceeds to step S66 without going through steps S63 to S64.

  Next, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the advantageous state end flag is turned on (set) (step S66). At this time, if the advantageous state end flag is off (not set) (step S66; No), it is further determined whether or not the advantageous state flag is on (set) (step S67).

  If the advantageous state flag is off (not set) (step S67; No), there is no need to update the time count count value, so that the process proceeds to step S75 without performing steps S67 + to S70. If the advantageous state flag is on (set) (step S67; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer is the second, that is, whether or not the target of the special symbol game is the second special symbol. Determine (step S67 +). If the special symbol pointer is not the second (step S67 +; No), the process proceeds to step S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is the second (step S67 +; Yes), it is counted by the short-time counter. 1 is subtracted and updated from the time count count value (step S68), and after the subtraction update command is sent to notify the effect control microcomputer 120 of the time count after the subtraction update (step S68 +), the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the short time count value is 0, that is, whether or not the advantageous state has reached, for example, 10 times which is a predetermined upper limit value for the second special figure game (step S69).

  At this time, if the time reduction count value is 0 (step S69; Yes), after clearing the advantageous state flag and setting the advantageous state end flag for ending the advantageous state in the next special figure game (step S70). On the other hand, if the advantageous state count value is not 0 (step S69; No), the process proceeds to step S75 without setting the advantageous state end flag. That is, the advantageous state end flag is set in response to the advantageous state reaching a predetermined upper limit value for the second special figure game, for example, 10 times.

  When the advantageous state end flag is turned on (set) in step S66 (step S66; Yes), the advantageous state end flag is cleared (reset), and the advantageous state flag is cleared (reset). The state is ended (step S77), and after the normal game state designation command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S75. That is, when the advantageous state is ended in the next special figure game in which the advantageous state end flag is set in response to reaching the upper limit number (for example, 10 times) for the second special figure game, the upper limit number of times (for example, Even if a big win is triggered by a special game that has reached (10 times), it can be determined as a big hit that occurred in a short time (advantageous) state.

  In step S71, the CPU 106 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 106 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 106 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11C.

  Next, the CPU 106 uses the selected jackpot type determination table, and the type (first to sixth jackpots) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. Is determined as the type of jackpot (step S73). In this case, the CPU 106 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined.

  Further, the CPU 106 sets (stores) data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 104 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is the first jackpot type, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the third jackpot, “03” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is the fourth jackpot, “04” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. Is set as data indicating the big hit type, “06” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and “06” is set as the data indicating the big hit type when the big hit type is the sixth big hit.

  Next, the CPU 106 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, according to the determination result of the jackpot type, any one of “1” to “5” or “7” corresponding to the jackpot type is determined as a special symbol stop symbol (see FIG. 11 (b), (c)). When the small hit flag is set, “1” to “4”, which are the small hit symbols corresponding to the small hit type, are determined as the special symbol stop symbols.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 106 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 106 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132a to 132b (FIG. 12 (a) as tables used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (b)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 106 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 106 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132c (FIG. 12 (c)) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 106 checks whether or not an advantageous state flag indicating that the time is short (advantageous) is set (step S95). The advantageous state flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving (advantageous) state, and is reset when the time-saving (advantageous) state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be the first to seventh jackpots, is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and the timing of digesting the number of times and the special symbol variation display is terminated when the jackpot is determined Then, it is reset when the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the advantageous state flag is set (Yes in step S95), the CPU 106 proceeds to step S100 to determine the variation pattern type for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. After selecting the determination table 135b (see FIG. 13B), the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the advantageous state flag is not set (No in step S95), the CPU 106 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (No in step S96), the CPU 106 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135a for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 13 (a)) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S100 is executed, when the gaming state is a short time (advantageous) state or the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, FIG. The variation pattern type determination table 135b for loss is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 15). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a short time (advantageous) state or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a short time (advantageous) state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). The fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 106 determines Yes in step S95, the CPU 106 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135a (see FIG. 13A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 106 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and selects the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S97 or S100. By referencing, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102, the CPU 106 uses hit variation pattern determination tables 137a and 137b (see FIG. 14) as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138a (see FIG. 15) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). In the case where the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 106 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 104 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 and S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 13) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 13). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 106 matches the determination value assigned to the common range in the reach determination table in determining whether “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 106 transmits any effect control command (refer to FIG. 22) of display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 106 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is 15 round big hit (fourth to sixth big hit), control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). When the big hit type is a big hit for five rounds (first to third big hits), control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S114). Further, when the small hit flag is set, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S116 and S117). If the small hit flag is not set (No in step S116), that is, if it is out of place, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 106 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S113).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 106 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 106 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). When data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 120 for effect control is performed (step S132). When the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S147 (step S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 106 performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S134). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a big hit of five rounds (first to third jackpots), a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is 15 round big hits (fourth to sixth big hits), a big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is the first big hit or the sixth big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 104 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S135).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the image display device 5 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). In addition, when the number of times of opening (for example, 5 round big hits (first to third big hits) is 5 times, 15 round big hits (fourth to sixth big hits) in the lower big prize opening 60 opening number counter Is set 15 times (step S137).

  Further, the CPU 106 determines whether or not an advantageous state flag indicating that the time is short (advantageous) is turned on (set).

  If the advantageous state flag indicating the short-time (advantageous) state is turned on (set) (step S138; Yes), the big hit hour advantageous flag is set to the on state (step S139), and the advantageous The state flag is cleared (reset) to be turned off (not set) (step S140). The time reduction counter is cleared and the time reduction count value is initialized to “0” (step S141). When the advantageous state flag is ON in step S138 (step S138; Yes), the time reduction ( Advantage) Since the advantage state end flag may have been directly hit after being set in the second special figure game that reaches the upper limit number of states, if it is set, the advantage state end flag is reset. (Clear) to turn it off (not set) (step S142). As described above, by setting the big hit advantage flag in the step S139, it is memorized that the gaming state was the short time (advantageous) state before being controlled to the big hit gaming state. Can do.

  After the process of step S142 or when the advantageous state flag is OFF (not set) in step S138 (step S138; No), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305). The updated value is updated (step S143).

  In step S147, it is determined whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is not set (No in step S147), the CPU 106 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S149). On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set (Yes in step S147), the CPU 106 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S148).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a small hit release pre-processing (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release pre-processing, the CPU 106 first sets a small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type (step S151). In the processing of step S151, one of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 is set corresponding to the small hit type stored in the small hit type buffer. As a result, one of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 is set corresponding to which of the plural types of small hit symbols is determined as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S151, a small hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit type is transmitted (step S152), and the small hit game control time is set (step S153). For example, in the process of step S153, the CPU 106 resets the game control process timer to set the timer value to “0”, and sets a small hit game end reference value predetermined corresponding to the small hit game control time, Set as a comparison target with the game control process timer value. The small hit game end reference value set at this time is compared with the game control process timer value in the small hit release releasing process executed in step S309 shown in FIG. For example, the small hit game end reference value is set such that the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 from the first big winning port 31 that has been opened by the starting operation after starting the small hit gaming state is the specific region 49. It is sufficient that the timer reference value corresponds to a sufficient time until the vehicle enters. In other words, the small hit game end reference value is effective by the specific area switch 24 when the game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 31 that has been opened by the start operation in the small hit game state enters the specific area 49. The effective winning detection period, which is a grace period until the time of being detected, is shown. In addition, in the process of step S153, the game stop determination value corresponding to the grace period until the game is stopped may be initialized.

  After the small hit game control time is set in step S153, the small hit flag is cleared (reset) to be turned off (not set) (step S154), and the number of game balls that have entered the lower big prize opening 60 And a counter such as a remaining ball counter that counts game balls that have entered the variable winning device 40 are initialized (step S155), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit release processing. (Step S156).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release processing, the CPU 106 first updates the game control process timer value by adding 1 for example (step S161). The game control process timer value is set to “0” by the process of step S153 shown in FIG. 35, for example, and then updated every time the process of step S271 is executed. Corresponding values can be shown. Subsequent to the processing in step S161, various settings and controls corresponding to the updated game control process timer value are performed. At this time, various settings and control details are determined according to the small hit control pattern set in the process of step S151 shown in FIG.

  For example, the CPU 1016 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the first big prize opening opening determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S162). Here, when the start operation for opening the first big winning opening 31 in the small hit game state is executed a plurality of times, it corresponds to a plurality of different game control process timer values in the small hit control pattern. A plurality of first big prize opening opening determination values are set. In this case, in the process of step S162, if the game control process timer value matches any one of the plurality of first big winning opening release determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the first big winning opening is released. It is determined that the start determination value is met.

  In step S162, when the game control process timer value matches the first big prize opening opening determination value (step S162; Yes), the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven and the variable prize device 40 is driven. Is set to start the starting operation for opening the first grand prize port 31 provided in the first grand prize port 31 by the first grand prize port door 32 (step S163). In the process of step S163, generation of a drive control signal for starting driving the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is performed according to the drive pattern indicated by the first big prize opening opening control data included in the small hit control pattern. . If the game control process timer value does not coincide with the first big prize opening opening determination value in step S162 (step S162; No), the process of step S163 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the model solenoid drive determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S164). Here, when the foot model 51 included in the doll model 47 is operated a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state, a plurality of model solenoid drive determinations corresponding to a plurality of game control process timer values different in the small hit control pattern. Value is set. In this case, in the process of step S164, if the game control process timer value matches any one of the plurality of model solenoid drive determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the model solenoid drive determination value matches. Is determined.

  If the game control process timer value matches the model solenoid drive determination value in step S164 (step S164; Yes), a setting is made to start driving the model solenoid 52 provided corresponding to the foot model 51. This is performed (step S165). In the process of step S165, a drive control signal for starting driving of the model solenoid 52 is generated according to the drive pattern indicated by the model solenoid drive control data included in the small hit control pattern. If the game control process timer value does not match the model solenoid drive determination value in step S164 (step S164; No), the process of step S165 is skipped.

  And CPU106 performs various settings and control when a game ball approachs the inside of the variable prize-winning apparatus 40 from the 1st big prize opening 31 by performing the process at the time of the 1st big prize opening entry (step) S166).

  After executing the process at the time of entering the first big prize opening in step S166, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the model solenoid stop determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S167). ). Here, when the foot model 51 included in the doll model 47 is operated a plurality of times in the small hit game state, a plurality of model solenoid stops corresponding to a plurality of game control process timer values different in the small hit control pattern. A judgment value is set. In this case, in the process of step S167, if the game control process timer value matches any one of the plurality of model solenoid stop determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the model solenoid stop determination value matches. Is determined.

  When the game control process timer value matches the model solenoid stop determination value in step S167 (step S167; Yes), the setting of stopping the model solenoid 52 is performed (step S168). In the process of step S168, a drive control signal for stopping the drive of the model solenoid 52 is generated according to the drive pattern indicated by the model solenoid stop control data included in the small hit control pattern. When the game control process timer value does not coincide with the model solenoid stop determination value in step S167 (step S167; No), the process of step S168 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the first big winning opening opening determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S169). Here, when the start operation for opening and closing the first big winning opening 31 is performed a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state, a plurality of first control corresponding to a plurality of game control process timer values different from each other in the small hit control pattern. One big winning opening opening end determination value is set. In this case, in the process of step S169, if the game control process timer value matches one of the plurality of first big winning opening release determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the first big winning opening is released. It is determined that the end determination value is met.

  If the game control process timer value matches the first big prize opening opening determination value in step S169 (step S169; Yes), the driving of the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is stopped and the first big prize opening is determined. An operation for closing the winning opening 31 with the first large winning opening door 32 is set (step S170). In the process of step S170, generation of a drive control signal for stopping the driving of the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is performed according to the drive pattern indicated by the first big prize opening opening control data included in the small hit control pattern. . If the game control process timer value does not match the first big prize opening release determination value in step S169 (step S169; No), the process of step S170 is skipped.

  Subsequently, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the solenoid driving determination value for the lower big prize opening door indicated by the small hit control pattern (step S171). Here, when the opening operation for opening and closing the lower big prize opening 60 is executed a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state, a plurality of lower portions corresponding to a plurality of different game control process timer values in the small hit control pattern The solenoid drive judgment value for the big prize opening door is set. In this case, in the process of step S171, if the game control process timer value matches any one of the plurality of lower large winning opening door solenoid drive determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the lower large winning opening door It is determined that the value matches the solenoid drive determination value.

  When the game control process timer value matches the solenoid driving determination value for the lower big prize opening door at step S171 (step S171; Yes), the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is driven and the special variable winning ball is reached. A start setting is made to open the lower big prize opening 60 provided in the apparatus 7 (step S172). In the process of step S172, a drive control signal for starting driving the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is generated according to the drive pattern indicated by the lower big prize opening opening control data included in the small hit control pattern. When the game control process timer value does not coincide with the lower large prize opening door solenoid drive determination value in step S171 (step S171; No), the process of step S172 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the solenoid stop determination value for the lower big prize opening door indicated by the small hit control pattern (step S173). Here, when the opening operation for opening and closing the lower big prize opening 60 is performed a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state, a plurality of lower large corresponding to a plurality of different game control process timer values in the small hit control pattern. The solenoid stop judgment value for the prize opening door is set. In this case, in the process of step S173, if the game control process timer value matches any one of the plurality of lower large prize opening door solenoid stop determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the lower big prize opening door It is determined that it matches the solenoid stop determination value.

  If the game control process timer value matches the lower large prize opening door solenoid stop judgment value in step S173 (step S173; Yes), the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is stopped to be specially variable. An operation for closing the lower large winning opening 60 provided in the winning ball apparatus 7 is set (step S174). In the process of step S174, a drive control signal for stopping the driving of the lower big prize opening door solenoid 54 is generated according to the drive pattern indicated by the lower big prize opening opening control data included in the small hit control pattern. If the game control process timer value does not coincide with the lower large prize opening door solenoid stop determination value in step S173 (step S173; No), the process of step S174 is skipped.

  Then, the CPU 106 compares the game control process timer value with the small hit game end reference value, and determines whether or not the game control process timer value has reached the small hit game end reference value (step S175). At this time, if the game control process timer value has reached the small hit game end reference value (step S175; Yes), the special figure process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (step S175). S176) If the game control process timer value has not reached the small hit game end reference value (step S175; No), the value of the special figure process flag is not changed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening entry process in the small hit opening process (step S309). In the first grand prize opening entry process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 106 first determines whether any of the detection signals from the upper count switch 23 is in an ON state (step S501). At this time, if any of the detection signals from the upper count switch 23 is in an ON state (step S501; Yes), 1 is added to the remaining ball count value (step S502). On the other hand, when all the detection signals from the upper count switch 23 are in the off state (step S501; No), the process of step S502 is skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the specific area switch 24 is in an ON state (step S503). At this time, if the detection signal from the specific area switch 24 is in the on state (step S503; Yes), the specific ball detection flag (V winning flag) is set to the on state (step S504). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the specific area switch 24 is in the OFF state (step S503; No), the process of step S504 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the discharge port switch 25 is in an on state (step S505). At this time, if the detection signal from the discharge port switch 25 is in the off state (step S505; No), the first big prize opening entry process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the discharge port switch 25 is in the ON state (step S505; Yes), the remaining ball number count value is decremented by 1 (step S506), and then the first big winning port entrance is entered. End time processing.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hitting end process, the CPU 106 first transmits a small hitting end designation command (step S180) and determines whether the remaining ball count value is “0” (step S181). Note that the remaining ball count value is updated by executing the processing of steps S502 and S506 shown in FIG. 37 in the processing at the time of entering the first big winning opening in step S166 shown in FIG.

  If the remaining ball count value is “0” in step S181 (step S181; Yes), for example, by generating a drive control signal for stopping the driving of the model solenoid 52, the model solenoid 52 Setting for stopping the drive is performed (step S182). Thereafter, the game control process timer is reset to clear the timer value (step S183), and by executing the specific winning determination process, the game ball enters the specific area 49 in the effective winning detection period in the small hit gaming state. A determination is made as to whether or not (step S184).

  If the remaining ball count value is not “0” in step S181 (step S181; No), it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value has reached the game stop determination value (step S186). At this time, if the game stop determination value has not been reached (step S186; No), the small hit release process is terminated. On the other hand, when the game stop determination value is reached in step S186 (step S186; Yes), the abnormality notification process for notifying that the state is abnormal is repeatedly executed (step S187). As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped, and an illegal act performed by generating an abnormal state can be prevented. In the abnormality notification process in step S187, a predetermined notification screen is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, a predetermined warning lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, and a predetermined warning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. What is necessary is just to enable it to alert | report abnormality by outputting a sound or combining these.

  The abnormality notification process executed in step S187 may be repeatedly performed when the power supply from the power supply board is stopped, that is, until the power is turned off. In this case, when the power is cut off, the initial setting process is executed after the RAM 104 is cleared by pressing the clear switch when the power is turned on again, and the abnormal state is cleared (released). Good. On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the notification of abnormality may be ended even if the pressing operation of the clear switch is not performed when the power is turned on again. Thereby, since it is not necessary to input a special signal to the main board 11 in order to clear (cancel) the abnormal state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an illegal signal is input.

  In addition, the abnormality notification process executed in step S187 is repeatedly performed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, and can automatically recover from the abnormal state after the predetermined time elapses. It may be. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the game store clerk, etc. that an abnormal state has occurred, but from the abnormal state without clearing the RAM 104 by pressing the clear switch or turning on the power again. Since it is restored, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage given to the player when it is determined to be abnormal due to noise or the like. Alternatively, in the abnormality notification process in step S187, for example, after an effect control command to be an error command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to notify the occurrence of an error, the small hit release process is performed without entering the loop process. May be terminated. Alternatively, even when the game control process timer value reaches the game stop determination value in step S186, the CPU 106 detects the elapse of a predetermined time on the side of the effect control board 12 without executing the abnormality notification process, You may make it alert | report an abnormality. As an example, when a game ball is detected by any of the upper count switches 23 from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, an upper count detection command as an effect control command indicating the detection of the game ball is issued. Send. On the side of the effect control board 12, the elapsed time after receiving the upper count detection command is measured, and the measured elapsed time is predetermined without receiving the small hit end command or big hit start command from the main board 11. When the error determination time is reached, a process for notifying the occurrence of abnormality may be executed. In this case, for example, with respect to an abnormal winning corresponding to the detection of a game ball by any one of the upper count switches 23, only the operation of paying out the winning ball and notifying the occurrence of the abnormality may be executed. Thereby, for example, at the time of closing the store where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is possible to easily perform the ball exit compensation.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the specific winning determination process in the small hit end process (step S310). In the specific winning determination process, the CPU 106 first determines whether or not the specific ball detection flag (V winning flag) is set to the on state (step S510). At this time, if the specific ball detection flag (V winning flag) is on (step S510; Yes), the big hit flag is set to the on state (step S511), and the big hit type buffer corresponds to the seventh big hit as the big hit type. “07” is set (stored) (step S512), and a big hit start designation 3 designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 (step S513). Further, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S514).

  Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time timer (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a jackpot has been generated by V winning) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S515). In addition, after setting the number of times of opening corresponding to the seventh big hit to 14 times in the lower big prize opening 60 opening number counter (step S516), the specific ball detection flag (V winning flag) is reset (cleared) and turned off. A (non-set) state is set (step S517).

  Next, the CPU 106 determines whether or not an advantageous state flag indicating that the time is short (advantageous) is turned on (set).

  When the advantageous state flag indicating that the time is short (advantageous) is turned on (set) (step S518; Yes), the big hit hour advantageous flag is set to the on state (step S519). The state flag is cleared (reset) to be turned off (not set) (step S520). Further, the time reduction counter is cleared and the time reduction count value is initialized to “0” (step S521), and when the advantageous state flag is on in step S518 (step S518; Yes), the time reduction ( Since the advantageous state end flag is set in the second special figure game that reaches the upper limit of the number of states, it may be a big hit by winning a small area and winning in the specific area 49. If yes, the advantageous state end flag is reset (cleared) to be in an off (non-set) state (step S522). In this manner, by setting the big hit advantage flag in the step S519, it is possible to store that the gaming state was in an advantageous state before being controlled to the big hit gaming state. After the process of step S522, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305) (step S523).

  On the other hand, if the specific ball detection flag (V winning flag) is not set to ON in step S510 (step S510; No), the small hit type set (stored) in the small hit type buffer is cleared. After (step S524), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S525).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 106 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S190). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S206. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S191), and then the processing from step S192 to step S205 is performed to determine whether the big hit advantageous state flag is present and the big hit type buffer. Based on the stored big hit type, it is determined whether the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and corresponds to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. Set a short number of times and send a jackpot end designation command.

  In step S192, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit advantageous state flag is set to the on state. If the big hit advantageous state flag is not set to the on state, the process proceeds to step S200, whereas if the big hit advantageous state flag is set to the on state, the process proceeds to step S193 and is set. Reset (clear) the big hit advantageous state flag.

  Then, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer is “7” corresponding to the seventh big hit, that is, whether or not the completed big hit is the seventh big hit ( Step S194).

  If the ended big hit is not the seventh big hit, the process proceeds to step S195, and further, whether or not the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer is “2” corresponding to the second big hit, that is, ended. It is determined whether or not the big hit is the second big hit.

  If the completed big hit is the second big hit, the process proceeds to step S196, where it is determined that the advantageous state after the big hit is the first advantageous state, and the initial value of the short-time count value is set to 2 times. Control is performed to transmit a jackpot end 1 designation command corresponding to the advantageous state to the production control microcomputer 120 (step S197).

  On the other hand, if the big hit ended in step S195 is not the second big hit, the process proceeds to step S204, where it is determined that the advantageous state after the big hit is the second advantageous state, and the initial value of the short-time count value is set to 10 times. At the same time, control is performed to transmit a jackpot end 2 designation command corresponding to the second advantageous state to the production control microcomputer 120 (step S205).

  If the big hit ended in step S194 is the seventh big hit, the process proceeds to step S203, where the small hit type data stored in the small hit type buffer is “1” corresponding to the first small hit, or Whether or not it is “3” corresponding to the third small hit, that is, whether the small hit generated by the completed seventh big hit is the first small hit or the third small hit generated in the short-time (advantageous) state Determine whether or not.

  If the small hit that the seventh big hit is completed is the first small hit or the third small hit that occurred in the short time (advantageous) state, the process proceeds to step S204, and the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first small hit. 2 is determined to be in an advantageous state, and 10 is set as an initial value of the short-time count value, and control for transmitting a jackpot end 2 designation command corresponding to the second advantageous state to the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed ( Step S205) On the other hand, if the completed small hit is not the first small hit or the third small hit generated in the short time (advantageous) state, that is, the second small hit generated in the short time (advantageous) state. If it is a hit or fourth small hit, the process proceeds to step S196, where it is determined that the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first advantageous state, and the short time count value Both sets twice as an initial value, performs control to transmit the jackpot Exit 1 specified command corresponding to a first advantageous state to effect the control microcomputer 120 (step S197).

  On the other hand, in step S200, the CPU 106 determines whether or not the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer is “7” corresponding to the seventh big hit, that is, the seventh big hit generated in the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not.

  If the completed big hit is not the seventh big hit, the process proceeds to step S201, and the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer is “3” corresponding to the third big hit and “5” corresponding to the fifth big hit. It is determined whether the jackpot is “6” corresponding to the sixth jackpot, that is, whether the finished jackpot is any of the third jackpot, the fifth jackpot or the sixth jackpot generated in the normal gaming state.

  If the finished big hit is any one of the third big hit, the fifth big hit and the sixth big hit generated in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S204, and the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the second advantageous state. And setting 10 as the initial value of the short-time count value, and performing control to transmit a jackpot end 2 designation command corresponding to the second advantageous state to the production control microcomputer 120 (step S205), If the finished big hit is none of the third big hit, the fifth big hit or the sixth big hit generated in the normal gaming state, that is, the first big hit, the second big hit or the fourth big hit generated in the normal gaming state. If YES in step S196, the flow advances to step S196 to determine that the time-saving (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first advantageous state and count the time-saving count. Both sets of two as the initial value of the value, performs control to transmit the jackpot Exit 1 specified command corresponding to a first advantageous state to effect the control microcomputer 120 (step S197).

  On the other hand, if the big hit ended in step S200 is the seventh big hit, the process proceeds to step S202, where the small hit type data stored in the small hit type buffer is “3” corresponding to the third small hit, or Whether or not it is “4” corresponding to the fourth small hit, that is, whether or not the small hit where the seventh big hit ended is the third small hit or the fourth small hit generated in the normal gaming state. Determine.

  When the completed small hit is the third small hit or the fourth small hit generated in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S204, and the short time (advantage) state after the big hit is the second advantageous. It is determined that the current state is in a state, and 10 is set as the initial value of the short-time count value, and at the same time, control for transmitting a jackpot end 2 designation command corresponding to the second advantageous state to the effect control microcomputer 120 is performed (step S205) ) On the other hand, if the completed small hit is not the third small hit or the fourth small hit generated in the normal gaming state, that is, the first small hit or the second small hit generated in the normal gaming state If it is, the process proceeds to step S196, where it is determined that the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first advantageous state, and the initial value of the short time count value is set. Both sets twice, performs control to transmit the jackpot Exit 1 specified command corresponding to a first advantageous state to effect the control microcomputer 120 (step S197).

  Then, after the process of step S197 or the process of step S205 is completed, after the big hit type and the small hit type set (stored) in the big hit type buffer and the small hit type buffer are cleared (step S198), the big hit end display timer Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (the big hit end display time) is set (step S199), and the processing is ended.

  In step S206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 106 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S207). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step 208, where the CPU 106 sets an advantageous state flag and shifts the gaming state to the short time (advantageous) state (step S208). In addition, the CPU 106 performs control to transmit a time reduction state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S209). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S210).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S27 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 106 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an ON state, thereby determining whether the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S401). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S401; Yes), a process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S402). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S401; No), the process of step S402 is skipped.

  In the processing at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S402, first, the number of reserved maps stored in the map reserved storage buffer of the RAM 104 is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). It is determined whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 106 displays numerical data indicating random number value 4 for determining the normal display result among numerical data updated by the random counter. To extract. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value random 4 is set at the head of the empty entry in the ordinary reserved storage buffer. At this time, for example, it may be updated so that 1 is added to the common figure reserved memory number count value which is the count value in the common figure reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S401 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, depending on the value of the usual process flag, the following is performed. Each process of steps S410 to S414 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S410 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage buffer. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure storage buffer, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S411 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random value random number 4 for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game is set to “per normal symbol”. Or “unusual” is determined. Also, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol change pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result and the presence / absence of the advantageous state is also determined.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S412 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display device 20 performs setting for varying the normal symbol. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed in the normal symbol display result, which is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol, when the normal symbol stop process in step S413 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S413 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display device 20 performs setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the normal symbol process flag value when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S412. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, the setting for driving the solenoid 55 for the ordinary electric accessory provided corresponding to the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is set. Is performed, and the value of the general process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the normal map display result is “out of normal map”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S414 is executed when the value of the usual process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 55 is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric actuating pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process in step S413. It should be done. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 55 is driven and the second start winning opening is set in the expanded open state is measured, and the elapsed time corresponds to the ordinary electric action pattern. A determination is made as to whether the extended opening time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the expansion opening period, the driving of the ordinary electric utility solenoid 55 is stopped and the movable blade piece is returned from the tilting position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is expanded and opened. Set to change from the state to the normal open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol determination process executed in step S411 of FIG. In the normal symbol determination process shown in FIG. 42, first, the CPU 106 uses the random number value 4 for determining the normal graphic display result as the reserved data stored in the universal symbol storage buffer corresponding to the reserved number “1”. Is read (step S431). At this time, for example, by updating by subtracting 1 from the general-purpose reserved memory count value, the general-purpose reserved memory number is updated so as to decrease by 1, and from the reserved number “1” in the general-purpose reserved memory buffer. The hold data indicating the random number random number 4 stored in the lower entry (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) is shifted upward by one entry (step S432).

  Subsequent to the process of step S432, the random value random number 4 shown in the numerical data extracted in the process of step S432 and the random number display result determination table 143 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the hit determination value data matches (step S433).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, it is determined whether or not it is out of the normal figure by the random value random number 4 regardless of whether or not the advantageous state flag is ON. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the advantageous state flag is on, more random number random numbers 4 are assigned to the determination value data per common figure than when the advantageous state flag is off. By setting the general chart display result judgment table in this way, in the advantageous state where the advantageous state flag is on, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the general figure game is likely to be “per common figure”, so that the normal variable winning is achieved. The second start winning opening formed by the ball device 6B may be easily expanded and opened so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. That is, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time (advantageous) state, the second starting condition for executing the special-purpose game by the second special symbol display device 4B is set as compared with the normal gaming state. You may make it easy to establish.

  If the random number random number 4 matches with the normal figure determination value data in step S433 (step S433; Yes), the normal figure hit flag is set to the on state (step S434). On the other hand, if the random value random 4 does not match the determination value data per usual map (step S433; No), the process of step S434 is skipped.

  Thereafter, based on the determination result in the process of step S434 and whether the advantageous state flag is off (not set) or on (set), the CPU 106, for example, uses the normal pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. The normal variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal variation variation time determined in accordance with the determined general variation variation pattern (step S435). Here, when the advantageous state flag is on, it is only necessary to set the normal fluctuation time to be shorter (30 seconds → 1 second) than when the advantageous state flag is off. As a result, in the short time (advantage) state when the advantageous state flag is on, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the ordinary game is shortened, so that the variable display result of “per symbol” is derived The displayed interval is also shortened, the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. Thus, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time (advantageous) state, the second starting condition for executing the special-purpose game by the second special symbol display device 4B is larger than that in the normal gaming state. It becomes easy to be established. After setting the normal symbol variation time in step S435, the value of the general symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the normal symbol variation processing (step S436), and then the normal symbol determination processing is ended. To do.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop process executed in step S413 of FIG. In the normal symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 106 first determines whether or not the universal symbol flag is on (step S451). At this time, if the common figure flag is on (step S451; Yes), after resetting (clearing) the common figure flag to the off state (step S452), the advantageous state flag is set to the on state. It is determined whether or not (step S453).

  When the advantageous state flag is set to the on state in step S453 (step S453; Yes), the normal electric operation pattern FA2 corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the short time (advantageous) state is displayed. Set (step S454). On the other hand, when the advantageous state flag is off (not set) (step S453; No), the general electric operation pattern FA1 corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the normal gaming state is set. (Step S455). Here, in the normal power operation pattern FA2, for example, as shown in FIG. 19, the expansion opening time is set longer than that in the general power operation pattern FA1. Thus, in the advantageous state in which the advantageous state flag is on, the extended opening time becomes longer, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Thus, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the advantageous state, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more easily established than in the normal gaming state. Become. After executing one of the processes of steps S454 and S455, the value of the general-purpose process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S456), and then the normal symbol is stopped. The process ends. In addition, when the normal symbol hit flag is off in step S451 (step S451; No), the value of the general symbol process flag is updated to “0” (step S457), and then the normal symbol stop process is terminated. To do.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 120 (specifically, the CPU 126) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the CPU 126 starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the CPU 126 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 126 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the CPU 126 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the CPU 126 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the CPU 126 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S706). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 22 and 23) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 120. As shown in FIG. 46, in this embodiment, a notice effect determination random number SR1 is used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  As will be described later, the announcement effect determination random number SR1 is a random number for determining that the reservation announcement effect is to be performed when the effect pattern of the effect symbol is out of non-reach (so-called false).

  In the RAM 124, a counter for generating the random number SR1 is formed. And the numerical value of a counter is updated by the random number update process (step S706) shown in FIG. That is, the value is incremented by one. Then, when the count value of the counter exceeds the upper limit value of random numbers (the maximum value in the range shown in FIG. 46), it is returned to the lower limit value (the minimum value in the range shown in FIG. 46). Reading the count value of the counter for generating the random number is called extracting the random number.

  Note that, as will be described later, in the hold notice effect, the hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18 changes the display mode of the hold display that is a super reach or the hold display that is a big hit, thereby changing the super reach or the big hit. It is an effect to notify in advance that it will be.

  The ROM 125 in the effect control microcomputer 120 stores various pattern tables such as a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 47 and various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 47, the rendering operation such as the rendering display operation in the reach rendering in the period from when the variation of the rendering symbol is started until the finalized symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The data indicating the control content is stored according to the variation pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, a plurality of control data for controlling various effect operations according to variable display of effect symbols such as process timer setting values, display control execution data, and lamp control execution data. Is set to

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 48, data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is stored according to rounds or the like. In each effect control pattern, a plurality of control data for controlling various effect operations such as a process timer set value, display control execution data, and lamp control execution data are set in time series.

  In these effect control patterns, at the start of the big hit gaming state, a big hit start screen including a big hit round display that differs depending on the type of the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player. CST1-1 (for 15 round jackpot), hit start CST2-1 (for 5 round jackpot), and hit start CST3-1 (for 15 (14) round jackpot by V winning) are included.

  In addition, the effect control pattern includes a big hit end screen including an upper limit number display of the short time state that differs depending on the type of the short time (advantageous) state given after the big hit at the end of the big hit gaming state on the image display device 5. Hit end CED1-1 (15 round big hit, for the first advantageous state), hit end CED1-2 (15 round big hit, for the second advantageous state), hit end CED2-1 (for displaying and notifying the player) 5 round big hit, for first advantageous state), hit end CED2-2 (5 round big hit, for second advantageous state), hit end CED3-1 (V winning big hit, for first advantageous state), hit end CED3-2 (V winning big hit, second advantageous state) is included.

  Further, the effect control pattern includes a first hit for displaying a small hit screen including a V winning probability display that differs depending on the type of the small hit on the image display device 5 and informing the player during the small hit gaming state. Small hit control CKD1 (for first small hit), second small hit control CKD1 (for second small hit), third small hit control CKD1 (for third small hit), fourth small hit control CKD1 (fourth small hit) Included).

  A collection of control data for each of the symbol variation control pattern and the various effect control patterns is referred to as a process table.

  49 to 52 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the CPU 126 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the CPU 126 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the CPU 126 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), CPU 126 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in RAM 124 (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the CPU 126 designates the display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the display result designation formed in the RAM 124. Store in the command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), CPU 126 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command or a jackpot start 3 designation command (step S621), the CPU 126 receives a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag or A jackpot start 3 designation command reception flag is set (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S623), CPU 126 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step S624). Then, the CPU 126 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the received small hitting start designation command in the small hitting start designation command storage area formed in the RAM 124 (step S624 +).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (step S631), the CPU 126 performs control to display an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been executed on the image display device 5. (Step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), CPU 126 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), CPU 126 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S645), CPU 126 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number designation command (step S651), the CPU 126 uses the second byte data (EXT data) of the first reserved memory number designation command as the first reserved memory number storage area. (Step S652). Further, the CPU 126 displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18 according to the first reserved memory number (specifically, the value of the EXT data) indicated by the received first reserved memory number designation command. The first reserved memory number display update process shown in FIG. 53 is performed (step S653).

  If the received presentation control command is the second reserved memory number designation command (step S654), CPU 126 uses the second reserved memory number storage area as the second byte data (EXT data) of the second reserved memory number designation command. (Step S655). Further, the CPU 126 displays the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 19 according to the second reserved memory number (specifically, the value of the EXT data) indicated by the received second reserved memory number designation command. The second reserved memory number display update process shown in FIG. 55 is executed (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step S657), if set, the CPU 126 resets an advantageous state flag indicating that the gaming state is a short time state (step S658). If the received effect control command is a time reduction state designation command (step S659), the CPU 126 sets an advantageous state flag (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction number designation command (step S663), CPU 126 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the time reduction number designation command in the time reduction number storage area (step S664). That is, the CPU 126 stores the remaining number of times in the time-saving state indicated by the time-saving number designation command.

  Next, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result designation command, the CPU 126 sets a flag corresponding to the received winning determination result designation command.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 1 designation command (step S665), specifically, “00 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S666, the CPU 126 sets a winning determination result 1 flag indicating that it has been determined that “non-reach is lost” at the time of starting winning in the first starting winning opening.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 2 designation command (step S667), specifically, “01 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If there is, the CPU 126 sets a winning determination result 2 flag indicating that it is determined that “normal reach is lost” at the start winning to the first starting winning opening (step S668).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 3 designation command (step S669), specifically, “02 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If there is, the CPU 126 sets a winning determination result 3 flag indicating that it has been determined that “super reach is lost” at the time of starting winning in the first starting winning opening (step S670).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 4 designation command (step S671), specifically, “03 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If there is, the CPU 126 sets a winning determination result 4 flag indicating that it has been determined that the “normal reach big hit” will be made at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening (step S672).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 5 designation command (step S673), specifically, “04 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If there is, the CPU 126 sets a winning determination result 5 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “super reach big hit” will be made at the start winning to the first starting winning opening (step S674).

  In addition, the CPU 126 sets a winning determination result flag according to the received winning determination result designation command. In this embodiment, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, “normal reach big hit”, “super reach big hit”, the hold notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not only the winning judgment result 1 designation command to the winning judgment result 6 designation command other than the winning judgment result 2 designation command have been received, and to set the flag.

  If the received effect control command is another command, CPU 126 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S677). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  Here, the first pending storage number display update process executed in step S653 will be described below.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 124 of the effect control microcomputer 120 is provided with a first hold display buffer for displaying the first hold storage display section 18 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, in the first hold display buffer, the storage corresponding to the ranks of the respective first hold storage numbers (the left corresponds to the higher order toward the display and the right corresponds to the lower order toward the display). An area is secured, and it is configured to store numerical data that can specify whether or not there is a start winning prize, a jackpot, a super reach, or a non-reach that is a target of a notice effect.

  In the first reserved memory number display update process, the CPU 126 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number indicated by the received first reserved memory number designation command is an increase (step S901).

  When the first reserved storage number is an increase (Yes in step S901), the notice target data “2” set in step S904 described later is set (stored) in the first hold display buffer shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S902).

  If the advance notice target data has already been set, that is, if the advance notice target already exists, the process proceeds to step S910, and the lowest position (“0” indicating no winning is stored in the first hold display buffer). The winning data “1” indicating the start winning is stored as the data of the highest ranking among the rankings), and the process proceeds to step S905.

  On the other hand, when the notice target data is not set, that is, when the notice target does not exist, the process proceeds to step S903, and the winning determination result 3 indicating reception of the super-reach is received. Whether or not the flag, the winning determination result 4 flag indicating reception of the normal reach jackpot indicating the winning command, or the winning determination result flag 5 indicating reception of the winning command determining result 5 indicating the super reach jackpot is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not a super reach occurs or a big hit occurs in the effect symbol variation corresponding to the corresponding reserved memory, in which the newly added reserved memory number is determined (step S903).

  If the winning determination result 3-5 flag is not set (No in step S903), the process proceeds to step S907, and the winning determination result 1 flag is set by receiving the winning determination result 1 designation command indicating non-reach failure. It is determined whether or not it is set, that is, whether or not the newly added reserved memory count is out of reach in the effect symbol variation corresponding to the corresponding reserved memory.

  If the winning determination result 1 flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S910, and the lowest position of the first hold display buffer (the highest rank among the ranks storing “0” indicating no win). As the data, winning data “1” indicating that winning is stored.

  On the other hand, if the winning determination result 1 flag is set, the process proceeds to step S908, where the random number SR1 for determining the notice effect is extracted, and the extracted SR1 is a determination value for determining that the reserved notice effect is to be executed. It is determined whether or not it is a certain “1”. In other words, the notice target data “2” is not set (stored) in the first hold display buffer, and the newly added hold storage number is out of reach in the effect design variation corresponding to the corresponding hold storage. In such a case, a lottery for carrying out the hold notice effect is carried out, and a hold notice effect (so-called false notice) that is out of reach in the effect symbol variation is carried out with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this embodiment). Then decide.

  When the extracted SR1 is “1”, the process proceeds to step S904, where the data is the lowest order data in the first hold display buffer (the highest order among the orders in which “0” indicating no winning is stored). After storing “2” as the notification target data, the process proceeds to step S905.

  On the other hand, if the extracted SR1 is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S910, where the lowest rank of the first hold display buffer (the highest rank among the ranks storing “0” indicating no winning) is stored. After storing the winning data “1” indicating the start winning as data, the process proceeds to step S905.

  After the process of step S904 or the process of step S910, in step S905, the CPU 126 clears all the winning determination result flags that are set. Based on the first hold display buffer, the display of the first hold storage display unit 18 is updated (step S906).

  Specifically, with respect to the hold display corresponding to the order in which “1” indicating the start winning is stored in the first hold display buffer, a predetermined red “●” indicating the hold is displayed, and the advance notice is given. As for the hold display corresponding to the order in which the target data “2” is stored, “★” is displayed to notify that there is a possibility of being a big hit or super reach, while “0” indicating no winning is displayed. ”Is stored, by displaying a blue“ ● ”indicating no hold, as shown in FIG. 54, the number of hold memories is the same as the lighting state of the first special symbol hold memory LED 15A. Is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the maximum display number of ★ displayed on the first hold storage display unit 18 is set to 1 by storing at most one notice target data in the first hold display buffer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum number of ★ displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 18 may be set to 2 or 3, or no restriction may be provided.

  If the first reserved memory number is not increased (No in step S901), that is, if the first reserved memory number is decreased, the process proceeds to step S911, and the highest (first) storage in the first reserved display buffer is performed. The data in the area is cleared and the contents of each storage area are shifted to the next higher rank and updated. In other words, the data of rank 1 is deleted from the first hold display buffer, and the data stored in the save areas corresponding to ranks 2, 3, and 4 are stored in the save areas corresponding to ranks 1, 2, and 3. After “0” indicating no winning is stored in the rank 4, the process proceeds to step S906, and the display of the first hold storage display unit 18 is updated based on the updated first hold display buffer.

  Next, the second reserved memory number display update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the second reserved memory number display update process, the CPU 126 first determines whether or not the second reserved memory number indicated by the received second reserved memory number designation command is an increase (step S921).

  If the second reserved storage number is an increase (Yes in step S921), the lowest position of the second reserved display buffer shown in FIG. 56 (the highest rank among the ranks storing “0” indicating no winning) is stored. The winning data “1” indicating the start winning is stored as the data of the order of (), and the process proceeds to step S924.

  On the other hand, if the second reserved memory number is not increased (No in step S921), that is, if the second reserved memory number is decreased, the process proceeds to step S923, and the highest (first) storage in the second reserved display buffer is performed. The data in the area is cleared and the contents of each storage area are shifted to the next higher rank and updated. That is, the rank 1 data is deleted from the second hold display buffer, and the data stored in the storage areas corresponding to the ranks 2, 3, and 4 are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the ranks 1, 2, and 3. In the rank 4, “0” indicating no winning is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S924.

  After the process of step S922 or the process of step S923, in step S924, the CPU 126 updates the display of the second hold storage display unit 19 based on the second hold display buffer.

  Specifically, for the hold display corresponding to the order in which “1” indicating start winning is stored in the first hold display buffer, a predetermined yellow “●” indicating hold is displayed, With respect to the order in which “0” indicating no winning is stored, by displaying a green “●” indicating no holding, as shown in FIG. 56, the lighting state of the second special symbol holding storage LED 15B and Similarly, the number of stored storage is displayed.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the CPU 126 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the image display device 5 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is realized, but the effect symbol (decorative symbol) synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is realized. Control related to variable display and control related to variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804), the small hit display process (step S807), or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a designation command during opening of the lower big prize opening 60 or a designation command after opening the lower big prize opening 60, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S806).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S806): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Small win display process (step S807): In the image display device 5, a small win screen including the V winning probability corresponding to the type of the small hit is displayed, and the player is notified of the V winning probability together with the fact that the small hit has been made. Perform display control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812).

  Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the CPU 126 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S821). Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is determined according to the effect mode of the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) (step S822). . CPU 126 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) in the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 60, when the received display result designation command indicates a big round big hit (first to third big hits) (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), The CPU 126 determines a combination of performance symbols in which three symbols are even symbols (stop symbols that remind the occurrence of a big hit of five rounds) as stop symbols. When the received display result designation command indicates 15 round big hits (fourth to sixth big hits) (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the CPU 126 displays 3 as a stop symbol. The combination of effect symbols in which the symbols are odd symbols (stop symbols reminiscent of generating 15 rounds of big hits) is determined. In the case of a loss (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. If the received display result designation command indicates a small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command), the CPU 126 produces a chance effect such as “135” as the stop symbol. Determine the combination of symbols. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol (decorative symbol).

  CPU126 extracts the random number for determining a stop symbol, for example, and determines the stop symbol of an effect symbol using the stop symbol determination table with which the data which show the combination of effect symbol, and the numerical value are matched. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the CPU 126 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S823). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S826).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the CPU 126 executes control of the rendering device is set. That is, the CPU 126 controls an effect device (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The CPU 126 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 61 is stored in the ROM 125 of the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, pseudo-stops, and temporary stop symbols in the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 126 performs a rendering device (the image display device 5 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and the like according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the speakers 8R and 8L) as a performance component is executed (step S827). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern in the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 121 including VDP and the like. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control unit 123 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control unit 122 in order to output sound from the speakers 8R and 8L.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 126 controls the variable pattern command so that the effect symbols are variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command, but the CPU 126 performs a plurality of types of variation corresponding to the variation pattern command. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from the patterns.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S828), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). (Step S829).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the CPU 126 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by 1 (steps S830A, S830B, and S830C).

  Further, the CPU 126 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S831). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S832). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S833). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data and the lamp control execution data set next (step S834).

  When the variation control timer has timed out (step S835), the CPU 126 displays the next display screen of the left, middle, and right effect symbols (screen to be displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the last effect symbol display switching time). Image data is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step S836). In this way, in the image display device 5, the effect symbol variation control is realized. The display control unit 121 including the VDP and the like outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. As such, in the image display device 5, the background image, the hold display, the character image, and the effect design in the change of the effect design are displayed. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (step S837).

  Further, the CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S838). If the change time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S840). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S839), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803). ) To a value according to (step S840). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends). In the process table used for the variation control of the effect symbol, process data during the effect symbol variation display is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table illustrated in FIG. 61 corresponds to the changing time of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the process of step S831, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data and lamp control execution data), and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table ends. . Effect design variation control (including control for displaying character images and backgrounds related to effect design variation) ends when the variation period has elapsed (corresponding to the time when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out). To do.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the CPU 126 confirms whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset (step S851). In step S852, control for deriving and displaying a stop symbol is performed in accordance with data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (step S853). Next, the CPU 126 checks whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S854), or whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S855). Whether it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed, for example, by a display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it is possible to confirm whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined according to the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S856). If it is determined to be a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S807) (step S857).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made, the CPU 126 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S858).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 120 ends the change (variable display) of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see steps S851 and S853). However, when the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the variation of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) may be controlled without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 100 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the CPU 126 receives any jackpot start designation command reception flag (a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start 1 designation command has been received, a jackpot start designation indicating that the jackpot start 2 designation command has been received) It is checked whether or not a 2 designation command reception flag or a big hit start 3 designation command reception flag indicating that a big hit start 3 designation command has been received (step S861). If any one of the jackpot start designation command reception flags has been set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the image display device 5 (step S862). Further, the set flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag, or big hit start 3 designation command reception flag) is reset (step S863). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S864).

  In step S862, the CPU 126 notifies the effect control pattern of the hit start CST1-1 shown in FIG. 48 for a screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot, specifically, if it is a big hit of five rounds. Control is performed to display on the image display device 5 a big hit start screen including a display indicating that the number of rounds is five rounds. If the big hit is 15 rounds, it is based on the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 shown in FIG. A control for displaying a big hit start screen including a display indicating that the number of rounds is 15 is displayed on the image display device 5. If the V winning (seventh) big win is given, the effect control of the win start CST3-1 shown in FIG. Control for displaying on the image display device 5 a jackpot start screen including a display of V winning based on the pattern and the number of rounds being 14 rounds Do.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the CPU 126 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S870). When the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S877. When the jackpot end effect timer is not set, a jackpot end designation command reception flag (a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag, a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag) indicating that any jackpot termination designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether it has been done (step S871).

  When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (step S872), and the set jackpot end designation command reception flag is terminated. It is determined whether it is a 1 designation command reception flag (step S873).

  When the set big hit end designation command reception flag is the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag, the process proceeds to step S874, and the big hit end screen (screen for notifying the end of the big hit game) including two times of the time reduction is displayed as an image. While the control to display on the device 5 is performed, when the jackpot end designation command reception flag that is set is not the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag, that is, when the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag, it proceeds to step S875, Control is performed to display a big hit end screen including the number of time reductions 10 times on the image display device 5.

  Specifically, if the big hit ended is 15 rounds and the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag is set, 15 rounds based on the effect control pattern of the hit end CED1-1 shown in FIG. When the jackpot end screen including the indication of the end of the open game and the fact that the number of time reductions is two is displayed on the image display device 5 and the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set, Control is performed to display a big hit end screen on the image display device 5 including an indication that the 15-round open game is ended and the number of time reductions is 10 based on the effect control pattern of the hit end CED1-2 shown in FIG.

  Also, if the big hit ended is a round five big hit and the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag is set, the game of 5 rounds open game based on the effect control pattern of the hit end CED2-1 shown in FIG. FIG. 48 shows a case where the jackpot end screen including the indication that the end and the number of time reductions are two is displayed on the image display device 5 and the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set. Control is performed to display a big hit end screen on the image display device 5 including an indication that the five-round open game is ended and the number of time reductions is 10 based on the effect control pattern of the hit end CED2-2 (FIG. 68 (a)). reference).

  Further, if the big hit ended is a V winning (seventh) big win and the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag is set, 14 based on the effect control pattern of the hit end CED3-1 shown in FIG. If the image display device 5 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen including an indication of the end of the round opening game and the number of time reductions being two, and the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set, Control is performed to display a big hit end screen on the image display device 5 including an indication that the 14-round open game is ended and the number of time reductions is 10 based on the effect control pattern of the hit end CED3-2 shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 126 resets the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag and the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S876), and ends the processing.

  In step S877, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S878). If not, the process ends. When the big hit end effect time has elapsed, the CPU 126 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the small hit display process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the small hit display processing, the CPU 126 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set based on the fact that the small hit start designation command is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 at the start of the small hit gaming state. If it is determined (step S880) that the small hitting start designation command reception flag is not set, the small hitting end designation command is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the small hitting gaming state ends. It is determined whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S884).

  If the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set, the process advances to step S881 to receive the second byte data (EXT data) of the received small hitting start designation command stored in the small hitting start designation command storage area. Based on the above, the small hit type (first to fourth) is specified.

  Then, a small hit screen including a big hit probability (V winning probability) according to the specified small hit type is displayed on the image display device 5, and the game ball enters the variable winning device 40 as well as being a small hit. The player is informed of the jackpot probability (V winning probability) that is a big hit by the V winning (S882).

  Specifically, if the specified small hit type is the first small hit, a small hit screen including a display of a V winning probability of about 20% based on the effect control pattern of the small hit control CKD1 shown in FIG. 48 is displayed as an image. If the control to display on the device 5 is performed and the specified small hit type is the second small hit, the small hit including the display of the V winning probability of about 5% based on the effect control pattern of the small hit control CKD2 shown in FIG. If the control for displaying the screen on the image display device 5 is performed and the specified small hit type is the third small hit, a display of a V winning probability of about 90% based on the effect control pattern of the small hit control CKD3 shown in FIG. If the type of the small hit is the fourth small hit, the V winning probability based on the effect control pattern of the small hit control CKD4 shown in FIG. Includes 50% display Performs control to display a per screen on the image display device 5.

  In step S883, the small hitting start designation command reception flag is reset (cleared), and the second byte data (EXT data) of the small hitting start designation command stored in the small hitting start designation command storage area is stored. clear.

  That is, during the small hit game, a small hit screen including a display of a V winning probability of about 20% corresponding to the type of the small hit is displayed on the image display device 5.

  When the small hit end specifying command reception flag is set based on the fact that the small hit end specifying command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 in response to the end of the small hit game, the steps S884 to S885 are performed. First, the small hit end designation command reception flag is reset (cleared).

  Then, the big hit start 3 designation command reception flag is set by receiving the big hit start 3 designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 in response to the game ball in the specific area 49 flowing in (V winning). If the big hit start 3 designation command reception flag is not set, it is judged whether or not the reception waiting time of a predetermined big hit start 3 designation command has passed, If not, by returning to step S886, whether or not the big hit start 3 designation command reception flag is set until the reception waiting time of the predetermined big hit start 3 designation command elapses, that is, the big hit start 3 Wait for reception of the specified command.

  If the jackpot start 3 designation command reception flag is set, the process proceeds to step S888, where the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804), while the predetermined jackpot start 3 designation is designated. When the command reception waiting time has elapsed, that is, when the game ball in the specific area 49 has not flowed in, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). (Step S889).

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the hold notice effect will be described. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold notice effect of the present embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 67, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (a) (b) (c) ....

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (a). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a prize-winning effect process based on the newly received start prize (see step S218A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 (see step S219A). Also, the updated first reserved memory number designation command is transmitted (see step S219A), and the effect control microcomputer 120 is based on the received first reserved memory number designation command, as shown in FIG. 67 (b). Thus, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18 is increased by 1 (see step S906).

  At this time, when the increased fluctuation pattern type of the stored memory (type of the determination result at the time of winning) specified based on the winning determination result specifying command received together with the first reserved memory number specifying command is the target of the reservation notice Or, if it is decided by lottery when a hold notice is given, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the hold memory is displayed as “★”, and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit or super reach. It is predicted that there will be. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 120 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the number of 1 reserved memory is reduced by 1, and the next effect design variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 120 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the number of one hold memory is further reduced by 1, and the next effect design variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (g), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command has been received, and the off symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 120 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the number of one hold memory is further reduced by 1, and the next effect design variation display is started.

  In this way, the hold display for which it is predicted that there is a possibility of a big hit or a super reach will sequentially move to the left toward the big win or a super reach as the special symbols and production symbols change. The player can grasp the situation where the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is approaching.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode from the end of the big hit to the small hit in the short time (advantageous) state after the end of the big win in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the big hit end screen. At the end of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the big hit end screen including the indication of the upper limit number of times (the number of time reductions) until the short-time (advantageous) state after the big hit ends, as well as the five round big hit Is displayed on the image display device 5 (step S874 or step S875 of the big hit end effect process).

  At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the effect process at the time of winning even if the first start winning is newly generated (step S217A), so that the determination result designation command at the time of winning is used for effect control. Therefore, during the big hits, the hold notice effect by displaying “★” is not performed. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, the hold notice effect by displaying these “★” is not performed. It is not displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 18.

  In addition, during the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the winning effect processing as in the case of the big win even if the first start win is newly generated (step S216A). The winning determination result designation command is not transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 120. Therefore, until the time-saving (advantageous) state during the big hit and after the big hit ends, the on-hold announcement effect by displaying “★” Is not implemented.

  Then, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to shorten the normal symbol variation time by being in the short time (advantage) state, and the opening time of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is 0.1 seconds of the normal game state. It is assumed that the second start winning of two balls has occurred by extending to 2 seconds.

  In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second start port switch passage process based on the newly received start prize (see step S314). Then, the updated second reserved memory number designation command is transmitted (see step S219B), and the effect control microcomputer 120 is based on the received second reserved memory number designation command as shown in FIG. 68 (b). Then, the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 19 is increased by 2 (see step S924).

  At this time, if both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number exist, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed (steps S52 to S54). As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the variable display of the second special symbol is started based on the second reserved memory number newly won and the second special symbol is displayed. The display of the number of reserved memories on the reserved memory display unit 19 is decreased by one.

  Then, in the variation display of the second special symbol, it is assumed that the third small hit is won. In this case, on the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbol "3" corresponding to the third small hit is derived and displayed, and at the same time when the special symbol "3" is derived and displayed. The image display device 5 stops and displays a combination of effect symbols such as “135”, which is a chance eye effect symbol.

  Then, by entering the small hit game state, the lower big prize opening 60 is opened twice for 0.1 second, and the image display device 5 has a third small prize opening as shown in FIG. A small hit screen corresponding to the win is displayed (step S882). FIG. 68 (e) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small hit screen. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the timing and the number of times the first big winning opening 31 of the variable winning device 40 is opened. As shown in FIG. 69, the probability of winning a V prize varies depending on the small hit, depending on the timing of operating the foot model 51. Therefore, the small hit screen including the display of the V winning probability (%) based on these small hits. Is displayed on the image display device 5 in the small hit game (execution of suggestion effect), the player can recognize these V winning probabilities (%), and improve the player's expectation for the big hit. Can do.

  FIG. 70 shows the first special winning opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid when the display result of the second special symbol is a number indicating “1” as a small hit symbol corresponding to “first small hit”. 52 is a timing chart showing an example of control timing of 52. In FIG. 70, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  When the first small hit occurs, any one of the special PG1 to special PG3 variation patterns is selected as the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 9, so that the second special symbol display device 4B has the second special symbol display device 4B. As shown in FIG. 70, the symbol variation display period is set to any one of the three periods of 1.5 seconds, 5.75 seconds, and 12.75 seconds.

  In step S151 of the small hit release pre-processing (step S308), the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type, that is, the small hit control pattern KP1 corresponding to the first small hit is set as the control pattern. In accordance with the driving pattern determined by the small hitting control pattern KP1, driving control of the first big prize opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid 52, and the like is started.

  Based on the setting by the small hit control pattern KP1, the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven by the first opening / closing drive pattern. In this first opening / closing drive pattern, as shown in FIG. 70, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a special chart is displayed corresponding to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the winning opening opening determination value in step S162 shown in FIG. After a predetermined waiting time (for example, 0.5 second, opening waiting period) corresponding to the time for which the fixed special symbol indicating the special figure display result is stopped and displayed after the game ends, the number of times of starting and releasing is The drive control of the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is started so that the opening time is “1 second” at “1” (step S163). Thus, the first big prize opening 31 provided in the variable prize winning device 40 has a start operation pattern in which the number of start / opens is “1” and the open time is “1 second”, and after changing from the closed state to the open state, The game control process timer value returns to the closed state in response to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the big winning opening opening determination value in the process of step S169 shown in FIG. 36 (step S170). The model solenoid 52 is driven by the first distribution drive pattern. In this first distribution drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, one second has elapsed from the timing when the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven and the first big prize opening 31 is opened. Until then, the driving of the model solenoid 52 is stopped. At this time, the foot model 51 is held so as not to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34, and the game ball is distributed to the lower stage 35.

  Thereafter, for example, in response to the game control process timer value matching the model solenoid drive determination value in step S164 shown in FIG. 36, the model solenoid 52 is driven, and in step S167, the game control process timer is set. The model solenoid 52 is driven for 1 second by stopping the drive of the model solenoid 52 in response to the value matching the model solenoid stop determination value. As a result, the foot model 51 moves downward to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34 and distributes the game ball to the lower ball path 36.

  As described above, in the case of the first small hit, the time for the first big winning opening 31 to be opened is relatively short, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable winning device 40, but it is separated from the foot model 51. While the period for distribution to the lower ball path 36 is short and the distribution is performed after the first big prize opening 31 is opened, there is a probability of winning a little V, and the V winning probability is about as shown in FIG. 20%.

  FIG. 71 shows that when the display result of the second special symbol is a number indicating “2” as the small hit symbol corresponding to “second small hit”, the first big prize opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid 52 is a timing chart showing an example of control timing of 52. In FIG. 71, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  Even when the second small hit occurs, the variation pattern of any one of the special PG1 to special PG3 is selected as the variation pattern as shown in FIG. As a period of variable display of the second special symbol on the display device 4B, as shown in FIG. 71, one of the three periods of 1.5 seconds, 5.75 seconds, and 12.75 seconds is set. Is done.

  Then, in step S151 of the small hit release pre-processing (step S308), the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type, that is, the small hit control pattern KP2 corresponding to the second small hit is set as the control pattern. In accordance with the drive pattern determined by the small hit control pattern KP2, the drive control of the first big prize opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid 52, etc. is started.

  Based on the setting by the small hit control pattern KP2, the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven by the second opening / closing drive pattern. In the second opening / closing drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, a special chart corresponding to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the winning opening opening determination value in step S162 shown in FIG. After a predetermined waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the time for which the fixed special symbol indicating the special figure display result is stopped and displayed after the game ends, the number of start and release times is “1”. The drive control of the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is started so that the opening time becomes “2 seconds” (step S163). Thus, the first big prize opening 31 provided in the variable prize winning device 40 has a start operation pattern in which the number of start opening is “1” and the opening time is “2 seconds”, and after changing from the closed state to the open state, The game control process timer value returns to the closed state in response to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the big winning opening opening determination value in the process of step S169 shown in FIG. 36 (step S170). The model solenoid 52 is driven by the second distribution drive pattern. In the second distribution drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, one second has elapsed from the timing when the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven and the first big prize opening 31 is opened. Until then, the driving of the model solenoid 52 is stopped. At this time, the foot model 51 is held so as not to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34, and the game ball is distributed to the lower stage 35.

  Thereafter, for example, in response to the game control process timer value matching the model solenoid drive determination value in step S164 shown in FIG. 36, the model solenoid 52 is driven, and in step S167, the game control process timer is set. The model solenoid 52 is driven for 5 seconds by stopping the drive of the model solenoid 52 in response to the value matching the model solenoid stop determination value. As a result, the foot model 51 moves downward to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34 and distributes the game ball to the lower ball path 36.

  As described above, in the case of the second small hit, the time for which the first big winning opening 31 is opened is relatively long, and the game ball easily enters the variable winning device 40, but is deviated by the foot model 51. The distribution period to the lower sphere path 36 is long and the distribution to the lower sphere path 36 is started when the distribution to the lower sphere path 36 is started while the first big prize opening 31 is opened. Since the probability is very high, the probability of winning the V prize is about 5% as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 72 shows the first special winning opening door solenoid 53 and the model solenoid when the display result of the second special symbol is a number indicating “3” as the small hit symbol corresponding to “third small hit”. 52 is a timing chart showing an example of control timing of 52. In FIG. 72, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  Even when the third small hit occurs, as in the other small hits, as the variation pattern, any variation pattern of special PG1 to special PG3 is selected as shown in FIG. As the period of variable display of the second special symbol on the display device 4B, as shown in FIG. 72, it is set to any one of the three periods of 1.5 seconds, 5.75 seconds, and 12.75 seconds. Is done.

  Then, in step S151 of the small hit release pre-processing (step S308), the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type, that is, the small hit control pattern KP3 corresponding to the third small hit is set as the control pattern. In accordance with the driving pattern determined by the small hitting control pattern KP3, the driving control of the first big prize opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid 52, and the like is started.

  Based on the setting by the small hit control pattern KP3, the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven by the third opening / closing drive pattern. In the third opening / closing drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the winning prize opening start determination value in the process of step S162 shown in FIG. After a predetermined waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the time for which the fixed special symbol indicating the special figure display result is stopped and displayed after the game ends, the number of start and release times is “2”. The drive control of the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is started so that the opening time is “2 seconds” and the time from the first opening end to the next opening start is “1 second” ( Step S163). In this way, the first big prize opening 31 provided in the variable prize winning device 40 has a start opening number of “2” and an opening time of “2 seconds”, and the time from the first opening end to the next opening start. After the start operation pattern of “1 second” is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game control process timer value in step S169 shown in FIG. The process returns to the closed state (step S170). The model solenoid 52 is driven by the third distribution drive pattern. In the third distribution drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, one second has elapsed from the timing at which the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven and the first big prize opening 31 is opened. Until then, the driving of the model solenoid 52 is stopped. At this time, the foot model 51 is held so as not to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34, and the game ball is distributed to the lower stage 35.

  Thereafter, for example, in response to the game control process timer value matching the model solenoid drive determination value in step S164 shown in FIG. 36, the model solenoid 52 is driven, and in step S167, the game control process timer is set. The model solenoid 52 is driven for 3 seconds by stopping the drive of the model solenoid 52 in response to the value matching the model solenoid stop determination value. As a result, the foot model 51 moves downward to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34 and distributes the game ball to the lower ball path 36, but after the driving of the model solenoid 52 is stopped. The foot model 51 moves upward and distributes the game balls to the lower stage 35.

  As described above, in the case of the third small hit, the number of times the first big winning opening 31 is opened is large, and the opening time is relatively long, so that the game ball is very likely to enter the variable winning device 40. Alternatively, the period of distribution to the lower sphere path 36 that is disengaged by the foot model 51 is relatively short compared to the period in which the first major winning opening 31 is opened, and the lower sphere is in the middle of opening the first major winning opening 31. Since the distribution to the path 36 is completed, the possibility of being distributed to the lower sphere path 36 is very low, so the probability of V winning is about 90% as shown in FIG. ing.

  FIG. 73 shows the first special winning opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid when the display result of the second special symbol is “4” as the small hit symbol corresponding to the “fourth small hit”. 52 is a timing chart showing an example of control timing of 52. In FIG. 73, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  Even when the fourth small hit occurs, as in the other small hits, the variation pattern of any one of the special PG1 to the special PG3 is selected as the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. As the period of variable display of the second special symbol in the display device 4B, as shown in FIG. 73, one of the three periods of 1.5 seconds, 5.75 seconds, and 12.75 seconds is set. Is done.

  In step S151 of the small hit release pre-processing (step S308), the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type, that is, the small hit control pattern KP4 corresponding to the fourth small hit is set as the control pattern. In accordance with the driving pattern determined by the small hitting control pattern KP4, the driving control of the first big prize opening door solenoid 53, the model solenoid 52, and the like is started.

  Based on the setting by the small hit control pattern KP4, the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 is driven by the fourth opening / closing drive pattern. In the fourth opening / closing drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the big prize opening opening determination value in the process of step S162 shown in FIG. After a predetermined waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the time for which the fixed special symbol indicating the special figure display result is stopped and displayed after the game ends, the number of start and release times is “2”. The drive control of the first grand prize opening door solenoid 53 is started so that the opening time is “1 second” and the time from the first opening end to the next opening start is “1 second” ( Step S163). In this way, the first big prize opening 31 provided in the variable prize winning device 40 has the start opening number of times “2” and the opening time “1 second”, and the time from the first opening end to the next opening start. After the start operation pattern of “1 second” is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game control process timer value in step S169 shown in FIG. The process returns to the closed state (step S170). The model solenoid 52 is driven by the fourth distribution drive pattern. In the fourth distribution drive pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, one second has elapsed from the timing when the first big prize opening door solenoid 53 starts to be driven and the first big prize opening 31 is opened. Until then, the driving of the model solenoid 52 is stopped. At this time, the foot model 51 is held so as not to contact the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34, and the game ball is distributed to the lower stage 35.

  Thereafter, for example, in response to the game control process timer value matching the model solenoid drive determination value in step S164 shown in FIG. 36, the model solenoid 52 is driven, and in step S167, the game control process timer is set. The model solenoid 52 is driven for 1 second by stopping the drive of the model solenoid 52 in response to the value matching the model solenoid stop determination value. As a result, the foot model 51 moves downward to come into contact with the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34 and distributes the game ball to the lower ball path 36 for one second, but the model solenoid 52 is driven. After being stopped, the foot model 51 moves upward and distributes the game balls to the lower stage 35.

  As described above, in the case of the fourth small hit, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 31 is relatively short, but the game ball is compared with the variable winning device 40 because the number of times it is opened is large. The period of time allocated to the lower sphere path 36 which is easy to enter and is separated from the foot model 51 is as short as 1 second when the first big prize opening 31 is not opened, and is not allocated to the lower sphere path 36. The probability of V winning is set to about 50% as shown in FIG. 69.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, from the derivation display (variation stop) of the second special symbols “1” to “4” which are the results of the small hit, the first grand prize winning 31 is opened and closed by movement. The time until the door 32 operates is the same (fixed) as 0.5 seconds, but the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to the operation of the first grand prize door 32 is the second time. Since one of special PG1 to special PG3 is selected as the special symbol variation pattern, there are multiple periods of 1.5 + 0.5 seconds, 5.75 + 0.5 seconds, 12.75 + 0.5 seconds. doing.

  In other words, the time from when the second special symbol that is the result of small hitting is derived and displayed (variation stop) until the driving of the model solenoid 52 is started is the same (constant) as 1.5 seconds. During the time from the start of the 2 special symbol variation display until the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation, one of the variation patterns of the special PG1 to the special PG3 is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. There are multiple periods.

  In the present embodiment, any one variation pattern of special PG1 to special PG3 is selected for each small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these variation patterns are Although it is fixed at the small hit, the fluctuation time for each small hit is, for example, the first small hit is 1.5 seconds, the second small hit is 3.5 seconds, the third small hit is 5.5 seconds, Different times may be set such that the fourth small hit is 7.5 seconds.

  Next, a gaming method of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  When playing a game, the player operates the hitting operation handle 30 so that the hitting ball launching device (not shown) disposed on the lower right side of the game board 2 when the pachinko machine 2 is viewed from the front is launched. Is done. The hitting operation handle 30 is provided so as to be rotatable around an axis that faces in the front-rear direction, and a hitting ball is launched by rotating right from the initial position, and the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) Is changing. In this embodiment, when the amount of rotation increases, the resilience increases, and when the amount of rotation decreases, the resilience decreases.

  A game ball launched by the operation of the hitting ball operating handle 30 is guided by a guide rail (not shown) and enters the game area from the upper left side of the game area formed in a substantially circular shape in front view on the front surface of the game board 2. . For example, when a game ball is fired by operating the hitting operation handle 30 in a first operation mode {for example, an operation mode in which a predetermined angle θ1 is rotated to the right from an initial position (for example, θ1 = about 40 to 90 degrees)} Most of the game balls that have entered the gaming area are located on the left side of the variable winning device 40 arranged at the center of the gaming area and below the variable winning device 40 from the upper part to the lower part of the first gaming area. Pass (flow down). Further, when the game ball is fired by operating the hitting operation handle 30 in the second operation mode {for example, an operation mode in which the right angle is rotated from the initial position by a predetermined angle θ2 (for example, θ2 = about 91 to 180 degrees)}. Most of the game balls that have entered the game area pass (flow down) from the upper part to the lower part of the second game area on the right side of the center of the variable winning device 40 arranged at the center position of the game area.

  As described above, when the batting operation handle 30 is operated in the first operation mode, since the resilience is weak, most of the launched game balls pass through the first game area, and the batting operation handle 30 is operated in the second operation. When operated in the mode, the resilience is stronger than when operated in the first mode of operation, so that most of the launched game balls pass through the second game area. That is, when the batting operation handle 30 is operated in the first operation mode, the game balls that have been fired pass through the first game area at a higher rate than through the second game area (the percentage of game balls is 100%). In the case of passing through the first game area). Further, when the hitting operation handle 30 is operated in the second operation mode, the shot game ball passes through the second game area at a higher rate than when the shot game ball passes through the first game area (the percentage of game balls is 100%). Including the case of passing through the second game area). In this way, the player can aim at either the first game area on the left side or the second game area on the right side by adjusting the rotation amount of the hitting operation handle 30 (separate left and right). ) Is possible.

  A normal winning ball device 6A is provided immediately below the variable winning device 40 in the first game area on the left side, and the player aims at the first game area on the left side in the first operation mode. To operate (also referred to as left-handed), a game with the first special figure game can be performed.

  On the other hand, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the variable winning device 40 in the right second game area, and a passing gate 41 is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The first big prize opening 31 formed on the upper right side of the variable prize winning device 40 faces the one end of the first big prize opening door 32 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 31. Since the game ball that protrudes to the right in the state and passes through the second game area is provided so as to be guided into the variable winning device 40, the player sets the hitting operation handle 30 to the right second game area. By operating in two operation modes (also referred to as right-handed), a game with the second special figure game and the variable winning device 40 can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the first game area and the second game area are a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a straight line from the lower right position of the variable winning device 40 obliquely downward (see FIG. 1). The game balls flowing down the second game area are caused to flow down without being awarded to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A provided in the first game area and guided to the out port 69.

  Further, in this embodiment, in a right-handed game, a variable prize is obtained by operating the game ball in an operation mode capable of entering the passing gate 41 and the normal variable prize ball device 6B for executing the second special figure game. The passing gate 41, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the first big winning port 31 are arranged so that the game ball can enter the variable winning device 40 when the first big winning port 31 of the device 40 is opened. Alternatively, although an obstacle nail is arranged, an operation mode in which a game ball can enter the passing gate 41 and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is different from an operation mode in which the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 31. The passing gate 41, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the first big winning opening 31 may be arranged or obstacle nails may be arranged so that

  Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

<Normal gaming state (left-handed)>
First, the flow of the game when left-handed in the normal gaming state will be described. When the game ball launched by the hitting ball launching device enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, While the lottery is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 4A in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol game. When the “first to fifth jackpot” display result is derived as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

  In the first special figure game, after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has been shifted based on the winning of “first, second, fourth jackpot”, the game shifts to the first advantageous state, and the jackpot that has shifted based on the winning of “third, fifth jackpot” After the end of the gaming state, the state shifts to the second advantageous state (see FIG. 11B).

  In addition, the winning probability of “big hit” in the first special figure game is 1/200, and the ratio of winning the “first, second, fourth big hit” is 1/3, and the “third, fifth big hit” is won. The ratio is 2/3. Therefore, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it shifts to the advantageous state at a rate of 100%, and the allocation is about 33.3% of the proportion to shift to the second advantageous state, and the proportion of the transition to the first advantageous state is about 66.7%.

  In the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state which has been shifted to the big hit in the normal gaming state, the transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is made at a rate of 100%. If the transition to the advantageous state is performed at a rate higher than the rate of transition to the normal gaming state, the transition may not be performed at a rate of 100%.

  Moreover, although the allocation ratio of the advantageous state which shifts after the end of the big hit gaming state is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it may be the same.

  In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state transferred based on the winning of the “first to third jackpot” is 5 rounds, whereas the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state transferred based on the winning of the “fourth and fifth jackpot” is 15 rounds.

<Normal gaming state (right-handed)>
The flow of the game when hitting right in the normal gaming state will be described. When a game ball that has been launched by the hitting ball launching device and then enters the second game area passes through the passing gate 41, a lottery for the usual game is executed. At the same time, in accordance with the lottery result of the normal game, the normal symbol display device 20 starts variable display of the normal symbols. Then, when the display result “per common figure” is derived as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol, the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is released once. In addition, when the display result of “out of normal” is derived as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol, the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is maintained in the closed state without being opened, so that the game ball is in the second state. Difficult to enter the starting prize opening.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening of the normal variable winning ball device 6B by opening the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the lottery of the second special figure game is executed, and the second In response to the lottery result of the 2 special symbol game, variable display of the special symbol is started on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the “first to fourth small hits” display result is derived as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, a small hit gaming state is entered and the first big prize opening door 32 is opened. When it enters the device 40 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, it is a big hit and the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, when the game ball does not enter the variable winning device 40 due to the opening of the first grand prize opening door 32, or when the game ball enters the variable winning device 40 but is not detected by the specific area switch 24, the normal gaming state Migrate to

  When the “sixth big hit” display result is derived as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the big hit is made without going through the small hit gaming state (so-called direct hit big hit).

  Here, in the ordinary game, the winning probability of “per ordinary” is 22/23, and the winning probability of “out of ordinary” is 1/23 (see FIG. 17). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds when either “per normal” or “out of normal” is won (see FIG. 18), and in the expanded open state based on the “per normal” win. Since the maintained period is 0.1 second (see FIG. 19), the game ball is hardly guided to the second start winning opening even if it is released.

  In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state transferred based on the winning of the “sixth big hit” in the second special figure game, and the big hit changed based on the small hit gaming state transferred based on the winning of the “first and second small hits” After the end of the gaming state, it shifts to the first advantageous state, and transitions to the second advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state transitioned to the opportunity based on the small hit gaming state transferred based on the winning of “third and fourth small hits” (See FIG. 11D).

  Here, the winning probability of the “sixth big hit” in the first special figure game is 1/200, and the ratio of winning the “first and second small hits” is 23/30, “the third and fourth small hits”. The winning percentage is 7/30. Therefore, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it shifts to the advantageous state at a rate of 100%, and the allocation is about 23.3% of the proportion to shift to the second advantageous state, and the proportion of the transition to the first advantageous state is about 76.7%. In addition, the number of rounds in the small hit gaming state transferred based on the winning of “first to fourth small wins” is 15 rounds.

  Further, when winning the first small hit, the small hit control pattern KP1 is selected, when winning the second small hit, the small hit control pattern KP2 is selected, and when winning the third small hit, the small hit control pattern is selected. When the pattern KP3 is selected and the fourth small hit is won, the small hit control pattern KP4 is selected. That is, the probability that a game ball that has entered the variable prize device 40 is won by the specific area switch 24 when winning the third small hit is the highest, and the case where the second small hit is won is inside the variable prize winning device 40. The probability that a game ball that has entered is detected by the specific area switch 24 is the lowest.

<First advantageous state, second advantageous state (left-handed)>
The flow of the game when left-handed in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is the same as that in the case of left-handed in the normal gaming state, so the description thereof will be omitted, and only the differences from the normal gaming state will be described below. To do.

  In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, after the big hit gaming state transitioned based on the winning of “first, third, fourth and fifth big hits” in the special figure game, the state shifts to the second advantageous state. After the big hit gaming state transitioned based on the winning of the “big hit”, the state shifts to the first advantageous state (see FIG. 11B).

  In addition, the probability of winning the “big hit” in the first special figure game is 1/200, of which the ratio of winning the “first, third, fourth, fifth big hit” is 2/3, and the “second big hit” is won. The ratio is 1/3. Therefore, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it shifts to the advantageous state at a rate of 100%, and the allocation is about 66.7% of the proportion to shift to the second advantageous state, and the proportion of the transition to the first advantageous state is about 33.3%.

  That is, after the end of the big hit gaming state triggered by the big hit in the advantageous state, a higher rate (about 66.3%) than after the end of the big hit gaming state triggered by the big hit in the normal gaming state (about 33.3%). 7%) shifts to the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.

  The first advantageous state ends when the big hit gaming state is reached or the number of fluctuations of the second special figure game reaches twice after the end of the big winning gaming state, and the second advantageous state is the big hit gaming state. Or after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of changes in the second special figure game reaches 10 times.

<First advantageous state, second advantageous state (right-handed)>
The flow of the game in the right-handed state in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is the same as that in the right-handed state in the normal gaming state, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, only differences from the normal gaming state will be described. To do.

  In the advantageous state, the winning probabilities of “per normal” and “out of normal” in the normal game are not different from the normal game state (see FIG. 17), but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is “per normal” or “normal”. If any of the “out of figure” wins, it will be 1 second (see FIG. 18), and the period of time that is maintained in the expanded open state based on the winning of “per ordinary” will be 2 seconds (see FIG. 19).

  That is, the normal symbol variation time is shortened from 30 seconds to 1 second as compared to the normal gaming state, so that an opportunity to execute the normal game within a predetermined period, that is, an opportunity to release the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. And the period during which the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the expanded and open state is extended from 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds, so that the chance of receiving a special drawing game lottery increases.

  The advantageous state in which the normal symbol variation time is shortened and the period during which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the expanded and open state is extended. In the first advantageous state, the big hit gaming state occurs or after the big hit ends. One of the two special figure games being played twice is established, and in the second advantageous state, the big hit gaming state occurs or the second special figure game is executed ten times after the big hit is over. The process ends when either of them is established.

  In the second special figure game, after the end of the big hit gaming state which has been shifted based on the winning of “first and third small hits”, the game shifts to the second advantageous state, and in the special figure game, After the end of the big hit gaming state that has been transferred based on the winning of the “second and fourth small hits”, the state shifts to the first advantageous state (see FIG. 11D).

  Here, the winning probability of the “sixth big hit” in the second special figure game is 1/200, of which the ratio of winning the “first and third small hits” is 1/2, and “the second and fourth small hits” The rate of winning is 1/2. Therefore, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it shifts to the advantageous state at a rate of 100%, and the allocation is about 50% for the second advantageous state and about 50% for the first advantageous state. It is.

  However, in the “first and third small hits” that are in the second advantageous state after the big hit is over, the probability that the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 is detected by the specific area switch 24 (the probability of an accessory) is high ( 20%, 90%) small hitting control patterns KP1, KP3 are selected. On the other hand, in the “second and fourth small hits” that are in the first advantageous state after the big hit is over, the probability that the specific area switch 24 detects the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 is low (5%, 50%). ) The small hit control patterns KP2 and KP4 are selected.

  That is, the probability that a big hit will occur in each small hit becomes a value obtained by multiplying the winning probability for each small hit by the V winning rate of the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit, and the first advantageous state and the second Since the advantageous period differs from the advantageous state, the probability of occurrence of each small hit and big hit differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

  As described above, in the first advantageous state, the probability that a big hit will be triggered by the first small hit is about 16%, the probability that a big hit will be triggered by the second small hit is about 3.6%, and the third small hit The probability that a big hit will be triggered by the hit is about 18%, and the probability that a big hit will be given by the fourth small hit is about 13.3%, whereas in the second advantageous state, the first small hit will be triggered The probability that a big hit will occur is about 80%, the probability that a big hit will occur with the second small hit is about 18.3%, the probability that a big hit will occur with the third small hit is about 90%, the fourth small The probability that a big hit will be triggered by the hit is about 66.6%.

  Therefore, the average probability that the second special figure game becomes the big hit gaming state with the first to fourth small hits in the first advantageous state of two times is about 12.7%, whereas the second special figure game has In the second advantageous state, the average probability that the big hit gaming state is triggered by the first to fourth small hits in the second advantageous state is about 63.7%. Therefore, in the second advantageous state, the first to fourth small advantageouss in the first advantageous state. At a rate (approximately 63.7%) higher than the rate of being a big hit gaming state with a hit (about 12.7%), it becomes a big hit gaming state with the first to fourth small hits as a trigger.

  That is, if the second advantageous state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, the ratio of winning big hits is triggered by the first and third small hits in the second advantageous state. It can be expected that the second advantageous state is continuously obtained.

  In this embodiment, when the second special figure game for the second time in the first advantageous state is finished or when the second special figure game for the tenth time in the second advantageous state is finished, the second reserved memory number is set. Since a maximum of four may be stored, even if the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state ends, if there is a reserved memory in the second reserved memory number at that time, the second memory based on the reserved memory Since the 2 special figure game is executed, there is a maximum of 6 chances when controlled to the first advantageous state, and a maximum of 14 chances when controlled to the second advantageous state.

  That is, when the second special figure game is finished for the second time without a big hit in the first advantageous state or when the second special figure game is finished for the tenth time without a big hit in the second advantageous state. However, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more at this time, the second special figure game corresponding to the second reserved memory number is executed after the advantageous state ends. However, since the advantageous state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal gaming state, the possibility of becoming the second advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state is reduced and the second special figure game based on the holding memory of 1 is performed. There is almost no increase in the number of reserved memories.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the ratio of winning a big hit (1/200) is the same whether a left-handed game or a right-handed game is played, but the variation time of a normal symbol is 30. In addition, since the opening time is 0.1 seconds even if the winning is made per ordinary figure, the game ball is hardly guided to the second start winning opening. That is, the execution frequency of the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is extremely lower than the execution frequency of the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A.

  In this way, in the normal gaming state, the execution frequency of the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is extremely lower than the execution frequency of the first special figure game, so that it is left-handed rather than right-handed. It is advantageous for a player to play a game.

  On the other hand, in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, the ratio of winning the big hit (1/200) is the same regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed, but the fluctuation of the normal symbol By reducing the time from 30 seconds to 1 second, not only will the chances of drawing lots of ordinary games increase, but the probability of winning per ordinary figure will be the same as the normal gaming state, Since the extended opening time in the case of winning is extended from 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds (opening extension), it becomes easier for the game ball to be guided to the second start winning opening than in the normal gaming state, and the normal winning ball device 6A Does not have a movable wing piece that guides the game ball toward the first start winning opening unlike the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B in the expanded open state The game ball starts second than the ball device 6A Because it becomes easier to enter the prize outlet, increasing opportunities for the second special symbol game is executed.

  As described above, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared with the normal gaming state, and the time for the movable wing piece to be in the expanded open state is extended. By increasing the rate at which game balls enter the second start winning opening, not only the execution frequency of the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is higher than the execution frequency of the first special figure game. Since the probability of winning a big hit in the variable winning device 40 in the small winning game state is higher than the probability of winning in the first special figure game, it is more advantageous for the player to play a right-handed game than to play a left-handed game. Become.

  Here, comparing the normal gaming state and the advantageous state (first advantageous state, second advantageous state), in the advantageous state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the normal gaming state, and the movable wing piece is enlarged. By extending the time to enter the open state, the ratio of the game balls entering the second start winning opening in a certain period increases, so that the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B than the normal game state. The frequency of game execution increases and the chance of shifting to the jackpot gaming state increases, and the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is all 15 rounds, and the number of game balls that a player can acquire in the jackpot gaming state increases.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, according to the type of the big hit, after the end of the big hit gaming state, it goes to the first advantageous state at a rate of 1/3. Transition to the second advantageous state at a rate. In other words, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the normal gaming state is not shifted and the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is shifted.

  And if it is not a big hit in this first advantageous state, it will shift to the normal gaming state, but if it is a big hit in two second special figure games in the first advantageous state, the big hit gaming state After the end of, the transition to the second advantageous state is made at a higher rate than the transition to the first advantageous state. In addition, if the game shifts to the second advantageous state, it will shift to the normal game state if it is not a big hit in 10 second special figure games, but it will be a big hit in 10 second special figure games. In this case, since the transition to the second advantageous state is performed at a higher rate than the transition to the first advantageous state after the big hit gaming state, the continuation rate of the second advantageous state is easily maintained. In the second advantageous state, when the big hit gaming state is triggered by the second and fourth small hits, instead of directly shifting to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the first advantageous state is entered. In order to make the transition, the opportunity to execute the second special figure game twice is given again.

  Therefore, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, the first advantageous state is again after the end of the next big hit gaming state, as compared to the case where the normal winning state is controlled. In addition, the second advantageous state is not only easily controlled to the second advantageous state having a long control period, but the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening, so that it is easily controlled to the big hit gaming state. That is, by controlling to the second advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state, not only the next big hit gaming state is generated, but also the big hit gaming state is continuously controlled after the end of the next big hit gaming state. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for being played.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 wins the first to fifth jackpots in the first special game (or the second special game) in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game according to the type of the big jackpot won. After the end of the state, it is determined whether to control the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, which has a different period of control to the advantageous state, and each second special game in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (Or the first special figure game) When winning the sixth big hit or the first to fourth small wins, depending on the type of the big hit or the small hit, any of the small hit control patterns KP1 to 4 having different V winning probabilities Whether to control is determined based on the small hit type determination table 131c. That is, which small hit control pattern KP1 to 4 is determined in each small hit gaming state generated in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, that is, the period for controlling to the advantageous state and each small hit gaming state Depending on the type of the start action and / or the movable action pattern selected in, it is possible to finish the game at a predetermined rate in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state without controlling to the big hit gaming state. , It is prevented that the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is excessively continuously controlled, and the combination of the advantageous period and the small hit control pattern may be different even when ending at a predetermined rate, This makes it difficult for the player to predict whether the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state will continue or will end, so there is a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue. It can be.

  Further, as in the prior art, when it is determined by lottery or the like whether to control to the advantageous state after the big hit gaming state ends, the advantageous state may not be obtained after the big hit gaming state ends. In the present embodiment, it is impossible to maintain a sense of expectation for the big hit, but in this embodiment, the big hit game state is always controlled after the big hit gaming state generated in the advantageous state. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  In this embodiment, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the number of times of execution of the second special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit (twice for the first advantageous state and 10 times for the second advantageous state). However, these upper limit times can be arbitrarily changed. Moreover, the termination condition of such an advantageous state is not limited to the number of executions of the second special figure game reaching a predetermined upper limit value. For example, the number of executions of the first special figure game is a predetermined upper limit value. Or the total number of executions of the first special figure game and the second special figure game may reach a predetermined upper limit value.

  Further, the condition for ending the advantageous state is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure game reaching the predetermined upper limit value in this way, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the big hit gaming state, Alternatively, the total number of balls in which the game balls have entered the variable winning device 40 in the small hit game may reach a predetermined value.

  Further, in this embodiment, an advantageous state is obtained by selecting which advantageous state to control from among a plurality of types (two types) of advantageous states (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) having different control periods. Although the control period has been determined, it may be possible to shift to two or more advantageous states with different control periods. Alternatively, instead of determining the type of advantageous state in this way, only the advantageous period may be determined by lottery or the like.

  In this embodiment, the small hit control patterns KP1 to 4 correspond to the first to fourth small hits on a one-to-one basis. For example, when the small hit type is determined, the determined small hits are determined. The small hit control pattern corresponding to each type may be determined from among a plurality of types, and in this way, the small hit type and the type of the small hit control pattern are determined for each small hit gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that a small hit control pattern having a high V winning probability is selected in each small hit game.

  Further, in this case, for example, in the second advantageous state, a small hitting control pattern having a higher V winning probability at a higher rate than in the first advantageous state may be selected. It is possible to effectively increase the rate of shifting to the big hit gaming state in the state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the second advantageous state having a longer control period than the first advantageous state is more advantageous to the player because there are many opportunities to win a big hit when winning the small hit in the second special game. However, for example, in the first advantageous state, the control period of the first advantageous state is set to the second advantageous state by selecting the small hitting control pattern having a higher V winning probability at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. Even if it is shorter than the advantageous state, the ratio of big hits can be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when controlled to either the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. The notification effect indicating that the right-handed game is advantageous is executed, but the advantageous state is ended and the normal game is completed without shifting to the big hit gaming state in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. When shifting to the state, a notification effect indicating that the left-handed game is advantageous may be executed.

  In this case, for example, when the end condition of the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, one or more second reserved memory numbers are stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Since the second special figure game (maximum 4 times) corresponding to the second reserved memory number is executed to enter the small hit game state, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. When the second special figure game based on the hold memory is executed after the end of the game, that is, when the production control microcomputer 120 determines that the second hold memory number has not yet been reached, the right-handed game is advantageous. It is preferable to perform the notification effect shown. In this way, even if the advantageous state ends, the player can reliably recognize that the second special figure game based on the second reserved memory number is executed, so that the small hit gaming state is executed. Despite being present, it is possible to prevent a left-handed game from being missed and a missed opportunity to be missed.

  In addition, when the second special figure game based on the second reserved memory number is executed after the advantageous state ends as described above, in the case of performing an effect to notify that effect, the last second special figure game in the advantageous state is A notification effect indicating that the advantageous state has ended when it is finished can be executed, and then a resurrection effect indicating that the second special figure game is still executed when the second special figure game is started can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the second special figure game will be executed even if the advantageous state ends.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 have a time of 1 after the second special symbol as the small hit result is derived and displayed (variation stop) until the model solenoid 52 starts to be driven. The same (constant) as 5 seconds, but the time from the start of the display of the variation of the second special symbol until the opening of the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the special PG1 as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. A plurality of periods exist by selecting any one of the variation patterns of special PG3. That is, even if the timing at which the foot model 51 is in the first state (posture held in the upward direction) after the second special symbol is derived and displayed (variation stopped), the variation pattern of the selected second special symbol is constant. Depending on the (variation time), the time from the start of the variation display of the second special symbol to the time when the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation changes, so that any of the small hit control patterns KP1 to 4 is selected. It is difficult to predict whether the foot model 51 enters the first state at the timing when the game ball enters the variable winning device 40 or when the entered game ball passes. The player's sense of expectation in the winning game state can be maintained.

  In other words, the gaming control microcomputer 100 has a plurality of types of waiting periods for opening from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B to the start of the starting operation for opening the variable winning device 40. Either one of the special patterns PG1 to PG3 is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B based on the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type. Control for starting the driving of the foot model 51 when a predetermined fixed waiting period (1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B is started. By performing a control to start a start operation for opening the first grand prize opening door 32 when the opening waiting period has elapsed from It can impart a change to the movable operation by starting operation and foot model 51 of the special winning opening door 32.

  Also, the timing when the foot model 51 enters the first state (model solenoid 52; OFF) and the timing when the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation (large winning opening door solenoid 53; ON) are different. This makes it difficult for the player to launch a game ball in time for the timing when the foot model 51 enters the first state or the timing when the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation. It is possible to prevent intentional aiming of more than the expected number of prize balls by generating big hits continuously by the technical intervention of the person.

  In addition, in the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4, the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation when a certain period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the second special symbol is derived and displayed (variation stop). However, it may be different for each pattern.

  The small hitting control patterns KP1 to KP4 are configured to start driving the foot model 51 when a certain period (one second) has elapsed after the first big prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation. However, it may be different for each pattern.

  In addition, the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 start the driving of the foot model 51 when a certain period (1 second) has elapsed after the first big prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation, and the second state. However, the first state may be changed to the first state when a predetermined time elapses after the first grand prize opening door 32 starts the opening operation, or a predetermined holding time (for example, 1). (Second), the first state and the second state may be alternately moved.

  Also, in this embodiment, according to the type of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed in the first special figure game, it is controlled to the first advantageous state after the jackpot gaming state is ended, or the second advantageous state The display result of the first special figure game is not only the jackpot display result, but also the display result of the kind that the advantage period after the end of the jackpot game state is more advantageous, that is, the second Since it expects that it will be a jackpot display result which transfers to an advantageous state, the feeling of expectation with respect to the result of the game by a 2nd special figure game improves.

  In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot won in the first special figure game, it is determined whether to control the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, it may be determined whether to control the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state by executing a lottery during the big hit gaming state.

  Also, in this embodiment, according to the type of the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol stopped and displayed in the second special figure game, the first advantageous state is controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state or the second In order to decide whether to control to the advantageous state, not only the result of the game by the second special figure game becomes the small hit game result, but also the kind of small hit that the advantageous period after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes more advantageous Since a display result is expected, the feeling of expectation for the game result of the second special figure game is improved.

  In this embodiment, according to the type of the big hit won in the second special game, the game is controlled to either the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after the big hit gaming state with the small hit as an opportunity. However, it may be determined whether to control to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state by executing a lottery in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  Further, in this embodiment, whether the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is controlled after completion of the big hit gaming state is notified in the big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit or small hit (FIG. 68 (a)), the interest in the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In this embodiment, at the end of the big hit gaming state, it is notified whether it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, but if it is in the big hit gaming state, for example, the start of the big hit gaming state It may be notified at the time, during the round or during the round interval.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ratio of the game balls entering the V winning area is determined based on the waiting period for releasing the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type determined when the second special game is started. Since a suggestion effect that predicts the possibility of entering the V area is executed, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for the game ball entering the V winning area.

  In this embodiment, the percentage display indicating the rate at which game balls enter the V winning area is suggested to indicate the possibility that the game balls enter the V area. However, the display is limited to% display. For example, the possibility may be suggested by the character to be displayed, the color of the background, the type of character to be displayed, or the like.

  In addition, during the advantageous state and the big hit game state, it is assumed that the big hit game state is continuously generated by the technical intervention of the player by not performing the hold notice effect in the first hold memory display unit 18. It is possible to prevent intentional targeting of more than a few prize balls.

  In this embodiment, the foot model 51, which is an example of a movable part provided in the variable winning device 40, enters the specific area 49 at a rate of 100% without contacting the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34. The first state (the posture held in the upward direction) guided to the lower stage 35 and the lower ball path 36 that contacts the game ball flowing down the upper ball path 34 and enters the normal area 50 at a rate of 100%. Although it was provided to be able to change to the second state to be guided (posture held in the downward direction), the game ball that flowed down the upper ball path 34 is higher in the specific area than the normal area 50 is guided. If the first state induced to 49 and the second state induced to the normal region 50 at a higher rate than that directed to the specific region 49 are provided so as to be changeable, the rate is 100% in the first state. Without guiding to the specific area 49 It may, in the second state, at a rate of 100% may not be induced in the normal area 50.

  In addition, the foot model 51 is not in contact with the game ball that has flowed down the upper ball path 34 in the first state. However, if the foot model 51 can be guided to the lower stage 35 that enters the specific area 49, the foot model 51 should be in contact. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 40 is provided with only the foot model 51 as a movable part that changes the flow path of the game ball that has entered the interior. 34. A movable body (for example, a hole different from the V-hole is provided) that moves in a fixed period between a first state in which the game ball guided by 34 enters the specific region 49 and a second state in which the game ball enters the normal region 50. And a release waiting period of each small hitting control pattern may be set to a different release waiting period within the range of the cycle of the rotating body.

  Thus, when the movable body is in the first state, the opening timing of the first big prize opening door 32 when the game ball that has entered the variable prize device 40 reaches the specific area 49 is determined by the movable body moving. The position (for example, the position of the V hole) is predicted as a guideline. In other words, the position of the V hole at the timing when the game ball enters the variable winning device 40 can be specified. The opening waiting period from the start of the change of the second special figure game to the opening of the first grand prize opening door 32 is determined to be a period shorter than the movable period of the movable body. Since it becomes difficult to predict the timing of launching the game ball in accordance with the opening timing of the door 32 using the movable position of the movable body as a guide during the opening standby period, the game ball is launched in accordance with the movable period of the movable body and variable prizes are awarded. Go to device 40 The technical intervention such is possible to prevent the situation in which gambling property being targeted deliberately assumptions number or more prize balls is too high results.

  In addition, the movable part such as the foot model 51 comes into contact with the game ball that has flowed down the upper ball path 34 as in the above-described embodiment, so that the flow path of the game ball can be either the lower stage 35 or the lower ball path 36. It is not limited to the one that can be changed, that is, the flow path can be changed, but the timing that is guided to the rotating body as described above, that is, the flow timing (flow speed, etc.) can be changed. It may be.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Further, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns other than super reach (normal reach and non-reach) according to the total number of pending storage. Therefore, by assigning the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variable display time as the total number of pending storage increases, the operating rate of the variable display decreases. It can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 13B is used, and the total number of reserved storage is 0 to 2 (3 or less). In some cases, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 13A is used (see steps S96 to S98). As shown in FIG. 74, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the ratio of reaching (normal reach, super reach) is smaller than when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 13B, the non-reach CA 2-2 variation pattern type is selected and the non-reach PA 1-2 is a variation pattern of shortened variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible by shortening the average fluctuation time as the total number of pending storage increases.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, a common determination value (230 to 251) is used for the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. ) Is assigned. Therefore, at the time of starting winning, it is possible to easily determine in advance whether or not it will be super reach if only the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is confirmed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where the distribution of the judgment values in the deviation variation pattern type judgment table is different for the two types of whether the total pending storage number is 0 to 2 or 3 or more is shown. The method of differentiating the determination values in the use variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the distribution may be changed more finely and stepwise according to the total number of pending storage. In this case, for example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0, 1 and the offset for the total pending storage count 2, the total pending storage count 3 and the total pending storage count 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared in advance, and the distribution of the variation pattern type with reach and the variation pattern type of shortened variation may be further varied in stages. In addition to such an example, various combinations of the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared in advance are conceivable. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a completely common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to the variation pattern type accompanied by super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. Although the case has been shown, the determination value for the super reach in one deviation variation pattern type determination table may include the determination value for the super reach in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of determination value assignment states in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 75, when the total reserved memory number is 3 or more, the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach, whereas the total reserved memory number 0 to In the case of 2, determination values 200 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it becomes easy to become super reach beforehand. Can be determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75, among the determination values 0 to 199 assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the range of the determination values 100 to 199 Are not included in the range 0 to 99 of the determination value assigned to the non-reachable variation pattern type when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. On the other hand, the range 230 to 251 of the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach when the total pending storage number is 3 or more indicates the super value when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. All of the determination value ranges 200 to 251 assigned to the variation pattern types with reach are included. Therefore, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning a prize, it can be easily determined in advance that it will be super reach.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 75, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. The determination values 200 to 229 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and the ranges to which the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns with normal reach are not overlapped. The range of determination values assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach may be overlapped between the case and three or more cases. For example, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type with normal reach is assigned. On the other hand, the determination values 180 to 229 may be assigned. Even in the case of such a configuration, some of the determination values 180 to 229 among the determination values 180 to 229 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Only the range of 199 is included in the range of determination values 100 to 199 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the combined pending storage number is 0 to 2.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a variation pattern type determination table for deviation is configured with a variation pattern with super reach as a group variation pattern type, but for each super reach type (for example, super reach A and super reach A). The variation pattern type may be divided into reach B). FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 76, determination values 230 to 237 are assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach A regardless of the total number of pending storage, and the variation pattern type with super reach B is assigned. Determination values 237 to 251 are assigned. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it is easily determined in advance that it will be super reach. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, even when the deviation variation pattern type determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 76, the distribution of the determination values of super reach A and super reach B may be different for each table. As in the modification shown in FIG. 4, for example, the determination value for super reach A and B in one deviation variation pattern type determination table is the determination value for super reach A and B in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It may be included. Moreover, you may comprise so that allocation of the judgment value with respect to the super reach A and the super reach B may overlap partially between tables. This can be similarly applied to both this embodiment and each modification shown in this embodiment.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variation pattern other than the variation pattern accompanied by super reach includes the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream. Therefore, even when the effect of notifying that it will be a super reach is not executed, the variable display with the pseudo-ream can be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when determining a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as a variation pattern other than a variation pattern with super reach, if the total number of pending storage is small, it is compared with the case where the total number of pending storage is large. Thus, a variation pattern having a large number of re-variation executions of the pseudo-continuous is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variations is performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), and the variable display operating rate Can be further prevented.

  FIG. 77 shows the assignment state of the determination value in the variation pattern type determination table for deviation when looking at the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity as the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. It is explanatory drawing shown. In this embodiment, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, The variation pattern type of normal CA2-6 is selected (see FIG. 13B). Then, as shown in FIG. 77, the fluctuation pattern of the normal PB2-1 with the pseudo-continuation with the number of re-variations of 2 is selected (see FIGS. 15 and 9). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, normal CA2 based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. A variation pattern type of −5 is selected (see FIG. 13A). Then, as shown in FIG. 77, the fluctuation pattern of normal PB2-2 accompanied by a pseudo-continuation with three re-variations is selected (see FIGS. 15 and 9).

  As shown in FIG. 77, even if the effect of notifying that it will be super reach is not executed, there is a case where variable display with pseudo-ream may be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state is increased. Can improve the interest of the game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, when variable display with pseudo-continuations is performed, when the total number of pending storages is as small as 0 to 2, variable display with three re-variations of pseudo-continuations is executed. When the number of reserved memories is as large as 3 or more, variable display with pseudo-continuations with a small number of re-variations as 2 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variation execution times is frequently performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation rate of variable display is lowered.

  In this embodiment, a variation pattern with super reach assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations and a variation pattern without pseudo-continuations as specific variable display patterns. (See super CA2-7 in FIGS. 9 and 15), the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 only involves super reach. A variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-continuations may be included. Further, even when a variation pattern with pseudo-ream is used together with super reach, the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern that has only super reach and does not involve pseudo ream as a specific variable display pattern. Variation pattern types that include only quasi-continuous and super-reach and quasi-continuous variation patterns. May be assigned to a range other than the determination values 230 to 251 as a variation pattern type including a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-ream is determined as a fluctuation pattern with a super reach, the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variation executions equal to or greater than a predetermined number (three in this embodiment). Can be determined. Note that the number of re-variation executions may be four as a variation pattern with superreach. In this case, when determining a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is less than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, two or three times). Since it is possible to determine a variation pattern involving a certain pseudo-ream, a game is expected that a super-reach may be achieved by executing a pseudo-ream whose number of re-variations is a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) or more. It can be held by a person, and the interest in games can be improved.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an assignment state of determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table when attention is paid to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations. In this case, the number of re-variations in the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 in the variation pattern of the super CA 2-7 with super reach is set to four pseudo-continuations as described above. Then, based on the determination value being in the range of 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 with super reach is selected (see FIG. 10). Then, as shown in FIG. 78, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, which are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuations of the number of re-variations four times, may be selected (see FIGS. 15 and 9). On the other hand, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the normal CA 2-6 variation pattern type that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 (FIG. 13 ( b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 78, the normal PB2-1, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with two revariations, may be selected (see FIGS. 15 and 9). When the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-5 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 (FIG. 13). (See (a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 78, the normal PB2-2, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with three revariations, may be selected (see FIGS. 15 and 9).

  As shown in FIG. 78, by executing the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 4 or more, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may become super reach, and to have an interest in gaming. Can be improved.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, the embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and is particularly advantageous for the player when the display result of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result. The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine that controls to an advantageous state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A Special symbol display apparatus 4B Special symbol display apparatus 5 Image display apparatus 6A Normal winning ball apparatus 6B Normal variable winning ball apparatus 7 Special variable winning ball apparatus 11 Main board 12 Production control board 20 Normal symbol display apparatus 22A 1st Start port switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Upper count switch 24 Specific area switch 25 Discharge port switch 28 Lower count switch 40 Variable winning device 60 Large winning port 61 Large winning port door 100 Game control microcomputer 104 RAM
105 ROM
106 CPU
108 Random number circuit 120 Production control microcomputer 124 RAM
125 ROM
126 CPU

Claims (6)

First variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of first identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, and each of which can be identified based on the establishment of the second start condition A second variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of second identification information, and deriving a display result to the first variable display means or the second variable display means to determine a game result Machine,
First holding storage means for storing a right to perform variable display of the first identification information based on establishment of the first start condition;
Second hold storage means for storing a right to perform variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Determining whether or not the game result is a specific game result for the variable display of the first identification information performed by one right stored in the first hold storage means; and the second hold storage means Whether the game result is a predetermined game result for the variable display of the second identification information performed by one right stored in the right, and the result of the game for the variable display of the first identification information. Pre-determining means for deciding at a higher rate than deciding to make a specific game result;
An open state in which a game medium can enter on condition that the result of the game by the variable display of the second identification information performed by one right stored in the second holding storage means becomes the predetermined game result; A variable winning device that performs a starting operation that changes to a closed state incapable of entering;
Specific detection means for detecting a game medium that has entered a specific area among a plurality of areas provided in the variable winning device;
The result of the game by the variable display of the first identification information performed by one right stored in the first holding storage means becomes the specific game result or the variable that has been released by the starting operation Specific game state control means for controlling to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium that has entered the winning device is detected by the specific detection means;
An advantageous state in which the gaming state is controlled to an advantageous state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the execution frequency of variable display of the second identification information is increased over a predetermined advantageous period after the specific gaming state is ended. Control means;
In the advantageous state, when the right is stored in both the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means, the variable of the second identification information is more variable than the variable display of the first identification information. Variable display control means for giving priority to display; and
When the first start condition is satisfied, the game result by the variable display of the first identification information performed according to the right stored in the first holding storage means is changed from the specific game result by the prior determination means. Means for determining when the start condition is satisfied, which determines whether or not to be determined;
After one right is stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means, a notice of the possibility that the result of the game by the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific game result by the one right. Production control means for executing pre-reading notice until variable display of the identification information performed according to the right is started based on the determination result of the start condition establishment time determination means;
In the advantageous state, during the advantageous condition determination limiting means for limiting the execution of the determination by the start condition establishment determination means,
With
The variable winning device is:
A guide path capable of guiding the game medium that has entered the variable prize device to any of the plurality of areas;
A movable part provided in the guide path;
With
The gaming machine may further include a movable operation and / or a starting operation of the movable unit based on the fact that the predetermining unit has determined that the game result is a predetermined game result for the variable display of the second identification information. An operation control pattern determining means for determining any one of a plurality of types of operation control patterns having different ratios of game media entering the variable prize device entering the specific area;
Operation control means for performing control to execute the movable operation and / or the starting operation based on the operation control pattern determined by the operation control pattern determination means;
The advantageous state control means determines the predetermined advantageous period to be controlled to the advantageous state after the end of the specific gaming state from any of a plurality of advantageous periods, and is controlled to the advantageous state. An advantageous period determining means for determining a longer advantageous period at a higher rate than when controlled to the specific gaming state when not controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the specific gaming state;
Comprising
A gaming machine characterized by that. The pre-determining unit may select one of a plurality of types of the specific game results as a result of the game by variable display of the first identification information performed by one right stored in the first holding storage unit. Can be determined,
The advantageous period determining means determines a different advantageous period according to the type of the specific game result determined by the prior determination means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The pre-determining unit may select one of a plurality of types of the predetermined game results as a result of the game by variable display of the second identification information performed by one right stored in the second holding storage unit. Can be determined,
The advantageous period determining means determines a different advantageous period according to the type of the predetermined game result determined by the prior determination means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that. Advantageous period notifying means for notifying the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determining means during the period controlled to the specific gaming state when the advantageous state is controlled after the specific gaming state is ended. Comprising
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that. In the specific gaming state, provided with a determination limiting means during the specific gaming state for limiting execution of the determination by the determination means when the starting condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the prior determination means;
The first hold storage means and the second hold storage means store the right up to a predetermined upper limit number,
The variable display pattern determining means includes
Determining a specific variable display pattern as a variable display pattern of the identification information at a higher rate than when not determining when the pre-determining means determines to be the specific game result,
A table in which determination values are assigned to a variable display determination random number and a plurality of types of variable display patterns extracted when one right is stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means. The variable display pattern is determined using a determination value table having different determination values assigned according to the number of rights stored in the first hold storage means and the second hold storage means when starting the variable display. And
In the determination value table, a common determination value is assigned to the specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of rights stored in the first reserved storage unit and the second reserved storage unit.
The production control means includes
The variable display determination random number extracted when the game result by the variable display performed according to the one right is determined to be the specific game result by the pre-determining means, or when the one right is stored Executing the pre-reading notice based on the coincidence with the common determination value;
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein

Images